20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 20 Enter names for the data series.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FSwapColumn 3b Switches the current column with its neighbor at the right.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertTextColumn 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FSwapRow 31 Switches the current row with its neighbor below.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertColumn 33 Inserts a new data series after the current column.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertRow 28 Inserts a new row below the current row.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FRemoveColumn 5e Deletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FRemoveRow 44 Deletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the label row.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 3e Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FsecondaryYaxis 3e Enter the desired secondary title for the Y axis of the chart.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FsecondaryXaxis 3e Enter the desired secondary title for the X axis of the chart.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FprimaryZaxis 34 Enter the desired title for the Z axis of the chart.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FprimaryYaxis 34 Enter the desired title for the Y axis of the chart.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FprimaryXaxis 34 Enter the desired title for the X axis of the chart.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2Fsubtitle 29 Enter the desired subtitle for the chart.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2Fmaintitle 26 Enter the desired title for the chart.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FInsertTitleDialog 38 Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 38 Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fbottom 67 დიაგრამის ქვევით ლეგენდის მდებარეობა.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fright 6a დიაგრამის მაჯვნივ ლეგენდის მდებარეობა.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Ftop 64 დიაგრამის ზევით ლეგენდის მდებარეობა.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fleft 6d დიაგრამის მარცხნივ ლეგენდის მდებარეობა.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fshow 90 განსაზღვრეთ თუ არის ნაჩვენები ლეგენდა დიაგრამისთვის.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2FLB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend e5 აჩვენოს ან დაიმალოს ლეგენდა, დააწკაპუნეთ ლეგენდის ჩართვა/გამორთვაფორმატირება ზოლზე.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 89 Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FNF_LABEL_DEGREES 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 47 Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCT_DIAL 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FPB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2f Opens a dialog to select the percentage format.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FPB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Opens a dialog to select the number format.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_VALUE_AS_NUMBER 71 აჩვენებს data pointeb-ის აბსოლუტურ მნიშვნელობებს.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_VALUE_AS_PERCENTAGE 70 აჩვენებს  data pointeb-ის პროცენტს სათითაო სვეტში.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FNF_LABEL_DEGREES 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FCT_DIAL 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FPB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2f Opens a dialog to select the percentage format.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_TEXT_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_TEXT_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FPB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Opens a dialog to select the number format.
3d %2Fmodules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_CATEGORY 43 data point-ის  ჭდე ტექსტის ნახვა.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_SYMBOL aa მომდევნო თითოული data point-ის ჭდის შემდეგ ლეგენდა ხატულაკის ჩვენება .
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryZ 4c Z ღერძის ჩვენება axis as a line with subdivisions.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryY 5f Y ღერძის ჩვენებბა ქვეყანყოფი ხაზეით
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryX 30 Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryY 87 The major axis and the secondary axis can have different scaling. For example, you can scale one axis to 2 in. and the other to 1.5 in.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryX 64 მერორადი  X ღერძის ჩვენება დიაგრამაზე.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
3c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FCB_SYN_POS_NEG be Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_NEGATIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_POSITIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_POSITIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FMF_NEGATIVE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_PERCENT 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_POSITIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_CONST 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_NONE 1d Does not show any error bars.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FCB_SYN_POS_NEG be Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_CONST 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_NEGATIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_NEGATIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
1f CHART2_SCH_ERROR_BARS_FROM_DATA cc For a chart with its own data, the error bar values can be entered in the chart data table. The Data Table dialog shows additional columns titled Positive X or Y-Error-Bars and Negative X or Y-Error-Bars.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_PERCENT 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars 45 Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FMF_NEGATIVE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 45 Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2Ftp_ErrorBars 45 Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FLB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_NONE 1d Does not show any error bars.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FLB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_POSITIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_NEGATIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FMF_POSITIVE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FMF_POSITIVE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel6 2a Name of X variable in trend line equation.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowCorrelationCoefficient 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowEquation 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FinterceptValue 23 Value of intercept if it is forced.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FsetIntercept 5f For linear, polynomial and exponential trend lines, intercept value is forced to a given value.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flogarithmic 22 A logarithmic trend line is shown.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FTP_TRENDLINE 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel7 2f Trend line is extrapolated for higher x-values.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpower 1c A power trend line is shown.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flinear 1d A linear trend line is shown.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FmovingAverage 39 A moving average trend line is shown with a given period.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fexponential 23 An exponential trend line is shown.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel9 2a Name of Y variable in trend line equation.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel8 2e Trend line is extrapolated for lower x-values.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpolynomial 35 A polynomial trend line is shown with a given degree.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel3 20 Degree of polynomial trend line.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel5 1d Name of trend line in legend.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel4 43 Number of points to calculate average of moving average trend line.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_2 89 Changes the scaling of the Y axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_OVERLAP 3b Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_1 54 This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary Y axis.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FNF_STARTING_ANGLE 70 Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_CONNECTOR 8b For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_GAP 33 Defines the spacing between the columns in percent.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FCB_CLOCKWISE ab The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FCT_ANGLE_DIAL 151 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal 6a The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical 68 The Vertical Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryZ 2a Adds gridlines to the Z axis of the chart.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryY 6a ღობის ხაზის ჩამატება Y ღერძის დიაგრამზე.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryX 74 ღობის ხაზების ჩამატება  X-ღერძის დიაგრამაზე.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryZ 3f Adds gridlines that subdivide the Z axis into smaller sections.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryY fd საკოორდინაციო ბადის ხაზების დამატება რომელიც ყოფს ქვედანაყოფებათ  Y ღერძს პატარა დანაყოფებად.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FInsertGridDialog ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
d .uno%3AZTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AYTitle 57 Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fauto 2b Automatically arranges numbers on the axis.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FshowlabelsCB 78 განსაზღვრავს ღერძის იარლიყის აჩვენოს თუ არა.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 2c Defines the text direction of cell contents.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FdialCtrl 45 Clicking anywhere on the wheel defines the variable text orientation.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FOrientDegree 33 Allows you to manually enter the orientation angle.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FbreakCB 48 ტქსტის შეწყვეტის ნებართვა.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fodd 42 Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FoverlapCB 39 Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FstackedCB 34 Assigns vertical text orientation for cell contents.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Ftile 2a Arranges numbers on the axis side by side.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Feven 41 Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers.
d .uno%3ALegend 3f Defines the border, area and character attributes for a legend.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB 8f Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary Y axis. To insert a secondary Y axis, choose Insert - Axes and select Y axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA 8f Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary X axis. To insert a secondary X axis, choose Insert - Axes and select X axis.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 3c Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_REVERSE 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_TIME_RESOLUTION 62 კრძალავს ძიებას ერთ მონაცემთა ველზე.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_MINOR_OUTER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_MINOR_INNER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
4d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_TICKS_OUTER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 8c გახსნა Grid დიალოგის  ბადის თვისებების განსასაზღვრავთ.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall a2 Opens the Chart Wall dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart wall. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor b4 Opens the Chart Floor dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3D charts. This function is only available for 3D charts.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea 96 Opens the Chart Area dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart area. The chart area is the background behind all elements of the chart.
f .uno%3ABackward 36 Sends the selected data series backward (to the left).
e .uno%3AForward 37 Brings the selected data series forward (to the right).
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FPolynomialsSpinButton 22 Set the degree of the polynomials.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FResolutionSpinbutton 13 Set the resolution.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSplineTypeComboBox 19 Apply a line curve model.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSmoothLinesDialog 19 Apply a line curve model.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_end_rb 6a Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_center_y_rb 7f Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_center_x_rb 39 Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_start_rb 3d Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end.
47 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 26 Select a color using the color dialog.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FLB_LIGHTSOURCE 2d Select a color for the selected light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_8 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FLB_SCHEME 49 Select a scheme from the list box, or click any of the check boxes below.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FCBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
d .uno%3AView3D 9f Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the y axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
17 SVX_HID_CTRL3D_SWITCHER 44 Click to switch between an illumination model of a sphere or a cube.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_3 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 26 Select a color using the color dialog.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the z axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_OBJECTLINES 42 Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FCBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 101 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_SHADING 3f Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_ROUNDEDEDGE 18 Edges are rounded by 5%.
49 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination 26 Set the light sources for the 3D view.
16 SVX_HID_CTRL3D_HSCROLL 61 Drag the bottom slider to set the horizontal position and direction of the selected light source.
16 SVX_HID_CTRL3D_VSCROLL 5c Drag the right slider to set the vertical height and direction of the selected light source.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FLB_AMBIENTLIGHT 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_1 45 Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_6 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_2 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_5 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_4 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_7 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FsecondaryXaxis 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fmaintitle 1d Enter a title for your chart.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fz 75 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryXaxis 2a Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal).
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fy 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fsubtitle 20 Enter a subtitle for your chart.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryYaxis 28 Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical).
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fshow 20 Displays a legend in your chart.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryZaxis 59 Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Ftop 2d Positions the legend to the top of the chart.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fright 2f Positions the legend to the right of the chart.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fx 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fleft 2e Positions the legend to the left of the chart.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fbottom 30 Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fnolines 3b Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fsort 6a Connects points by ascending X values, even if the order of values is different, in an XY scatter diagram.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Ftp_ChartType 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fproperties 33 Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fcharttype 1a Select a basic chart type.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 1c Opens the Chart Type dialog.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fsubtype 2a Select a sub type of the basic chart type.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F3dscheme 1b Select the type of 3D look.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fontop 31 Stack series display values on top of each other.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F3dlook 26 Enables a 3D look for the data values.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fshape 1d Select a shape from the list.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Flinetype 20 Choose the type of line to draw.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fstack 28 Displays stacked series for Line charts.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fpercent 27 Stack series display values as percent.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FCB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 10d For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FRB_DATACOLS dc Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FRB_DATAROWS d8 Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FIB_RANGE a1 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
42 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FCB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 11b For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FED_RANGE a1 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 4b Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_DOWN 36 Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2Ftp_DataSource a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FEDT_RANGE ff Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FLB_SERIES a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FLB_ROLE a1 Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FEDT_CATEGORIES 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_UP 34 Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FIMB_RANGE_CAT 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FIMB_RANGE_MAIN ff Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_ADD 88 Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_REMOVE 35 Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 2a Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 2a Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 45 Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement b6 Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements.
12 .uno%3AContextType 2c Displays the name of the current chart type.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 29 Resets all data points to default format.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 31 Resets the selected data point to default format.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 19 Deletes the Y error bars.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 16 Deletes the R² value.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1c Deletes the mean value line.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 18 Deletes all data labels.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 20 Deletes the selected data label.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 17 Deletes the major grid.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 19 Deletes the chart legend.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 33 Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 14 Inserts data labels.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 1f Deletes the trendline equation.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 15 Inserts a major grid.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 15 Inserts a minor grid.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 21 Opens a dialog to insert an axis.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 28 Opens a dialog to insert or delete axes.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Deletes the selected axis.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 27 Opens a dialog to insert an axis title.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 18 Formats the data labels.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1a Formats the selected axis.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 1f Formats the trendline equation.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 26 Opens a dialog to insert chart titles.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 17 Formats the chart area.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1b Formats the selected title.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 17 Deletes the minor grid.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 19 Formats the chart legend.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 20 Formats the selected data point.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 1c Inserts a single data label.
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 17 Formats the major grid.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1c Formats the mean value line.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 18 Formats the data series.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 20 Formats the selected data label.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 22 Formats the stock loss indicators.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 18 Formats the chart floor.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 17 Formats the minor grid.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 22 Formats the stock gain indicators.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 17 Formats the chart wall.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 19 Formats the Y error bars.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 48 Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R².
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 16 Formats the trendline.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector b9 Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialog for the selected element.
17 HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 68 Click the Options label to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptionsdialog%2Frevert 40 Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values.
14 HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Fok 24 Saves all changes and closes dialog.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Fcancel 27 Closes dialog and discards all changes.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fassignrb f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Frbassign f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatcol f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatrow f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbprintarea f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbfilterarea f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fassign f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fdelete 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fdestination-button f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
23 hid%2Fcui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdataarea f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdeldouble 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign2 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
2d modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fcatalogdialog%2Finsert 43 Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog.
1a ui%2Fgradientpage%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Freset 3c Resets modified values back to the tab page previous values.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DEL 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
2a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmacropage%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fdelete 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fformulabutton f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
2e modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Flibrary 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fdelete 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmultipathdialog%2Fdelete 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fdelete 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
23 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fdelete 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL c5 დაწკაპუნება გაუქმება-ზე ხურავს დიალოგს ყოველგვარი დამახსოვრების გარეშე.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fformulasref f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Frowref f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fvarbutton f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fcolref f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdelabbrev 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdestarea f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copies the selected element to the clipboard.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryupdateprogress%2FGalleryUpdateProgress 39 Updates the view in the window or in the selected object.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 28 Enables a selected object to be renamed.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY a0 Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a confirmation question appears before objects are deleted.
19 HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 35 Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 46 Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document.
17 HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 50 By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 53 Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 4f Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel2rb 71 მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა დიაგრამების სანახავად.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 6e მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა სათაურების სანახავად.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel1rb 1b8 ხსნის იარლიყების დიალოგის ფანჯარას სადაც შეგიძლიათ განსაზღვროთ თქვენი იარლიყების პარამეტრები და შემდეგ ქმნის ახალ ტექსტურ დოკუმენტს ამ იარლიყებისათვის ($[officename] Writer).
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fepsipreviewcb b6 Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 8a მომართავს კურსორს მონიშნული ტიპის შემდეგ ობიექტზე.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftiffpreviewcb 8a მომართავს კურსორს მონიშნული ტიპის შემდეგ ობიექტზე.
2d svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fsavetransparencycb ba Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Finterlacedcb 84 მომართავს კურსორს მონიშნული ტიპის წინა ობიექტზე.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftextcb a0 ხსნის მონაცემთა ბაზის ოსტატს მონაცემთა ფაილის შესაქმნელად.
29 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf-nospin 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthlb 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fheightmf-nospin 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
2e svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf-nospin 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 71 მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა სანიშნეების სანახავად.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 79 Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 62 Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 71 მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა დიაგრამების სანახავად.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fbinarycb a0 ხსნის მონაცემთა ბაზის ოსტატს მონაცემთა ფაილის შესაქმნელად.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fcharsetlist 41 Select the character set from the options used for import/export.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fquoteall c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ffixedwidth 2b Exports all data fields with a fixed width.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ffield 41 Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fasshown bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ftext 44 Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fcharsetdropdown 2c Specifies the character set for text export.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fmergedelimiters 3e Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Finputother 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2FTextImportCsvDialog 2b Sets the import options for delimited data.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ffromrow 35 Specifies the row where you want to start the import.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcharset b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Flanguage 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftofixedwidth 45 Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fdetectspecialnumbers 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftoseparatedby 27 Select the separator used in your data.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftab 2e Separates data delimited by tabs into columns.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fsemicolon 34 Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftextdelimiter 5c Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcomma 30 Separates data delimited by commas into columns.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcolumntype 5f Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fspace 30 Separates data delimited by spaces into columns.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flf 2d Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcr 34 Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flanguage 78 Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcrlf 4a Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Ffont 93 By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcharset 3d Specifies the character set of the file for export or import.
15 HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 30 Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerytitledialog%2FGalleryTitleDialog 2d Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object.
17 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 27 Inserts the selected graphic as a link.
12 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 49 Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document.
16 HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 32 The Preview command displays the selected graphic.
16 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 42 Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document.
1e HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 30 Allows you to save the background of a Web page.
1a HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 32 Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2b Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 64 If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible.
18 HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 36 Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 38 Opens a dialog where you can save the selected graphics.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerygeneralpage%2Fname 3f თემის სათაურის ჩვენება.
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 168 ხსნის დიალოგს, სადაც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ განსაზღვროთ თქვენი სავიზიტო ბარათის პარამეტრები და შემდეგ ხსნის ახალ ტექსტურ დოკუმენტს($[officename] Writer).
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 48 ქმნის ახალ  $[officename] დოკუმენტს.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 4f ქმნის ახალ  X ფორმის დოკუმენტს.
16 HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW c3 ქმნის ახალ $[officename] დოკუმენტს.დოკუმენტის ტიპის ასარჩევად დააწკაპუნე ისარზე
d .uno%3ANewDoc 49 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates.
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 66 ქმნის ახალ ტექსტურ დოკუმენტს ($[officename] Writer).
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 86 ქმნის ახალ ელექტრონული ცხრილის დოკუმენტს ($[officename] Calc).
b slot%3A5500 d1 არსებული შაბლონის გამოყენებით ქმნის ახალ დოკუმენტს ან ხსნის ნიმუშ დოკუმენტს .
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 3c Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress).
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 64 ქმნის ახალ ფორმულა დოკუმენტს ($[officename] Math).
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive a0 ხსნის მონაცემთა ბაზის ოსტატს მონაცემთა ფაილის შესაქმნელად.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 6a ქმნის ახალ სახატავის დოკუმენტს ($[officename] Draw).
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog a0 ხსნის მონაცემთა ბაზის ოსტატს მონაცემთა ფაილის შესაქმნელად.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 1b8 ხსნის იარლიყების დიალოგის ფანჯარას სადაც შეგიძლიათ განსაზღვროთ თქვენი იარლიყების პარამეტრები და შემდეგ ქმნის ახალ ტექსტურ დოკუმენტს ამ იარლიყებისათვის ($[officename] Writer).
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 3e ქმნის ახალ HTML დოკუმენტს.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2Fok a6 ქმნის ახალ დოკუმენტს, რომელიც ექვემდებარება "Label1" რედაქტირებას.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 43 Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftype eb Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fbrand 64 მონიშნეთ სასურველი ქაღალდის სახეობა.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Finsert 147 მონიშნეთ მონაცემთა ბაზის ველი, და დააწკაპუნეთ ისარზე სარკმლის მარცხენა მხარეს  და ჩასვით ველი იარლიყის ტექსტის სარკმელში.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fdatabase 104 მონიშნეთ მონაცემთა ის ბაზა, რომელიც გსურთ რომ გამოიყენოთ როგორც თქვენი იარლიყის მონაცემთა წყარო.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Faddress 145 ქმნის იარლიყს თქვენი საპასუხო მისამართით. იარლიყის ტექსტისსარკმელში მოთავსებული მიმდინარე ტექსტი ზემოდან გადაწერილია.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fsheet 73 ბეჭდავს იარლიყებს ინდივიდუალურ ფურცლებზე.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fcontinuous 5e ბეჭდავს იარლიყებს უწყვეტ ფურცელზე.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftable 123 მონიშნეთ მონაცემთა ბაზის ის ცხრილი, რომელიც შეიცავს იმ ველ(ებ)ს რომელიც გსურთ რომ თქვენს იარლიყში გამოიყენოთ.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftextview 113 შეიტანეთ ტექსტი, რომელიც გსურთ რომ გამოჩნდეს ამ იარლიყზეl. ასევე შეგიძლიათ ჩასვათ მოანცემთა ბაზის ველი.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2FCardMediumPage ad განსაზღვრეთ იარლიყის ტექსტი და აირჩიეთ შესაბამისი ფურცლის ზომა.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Ftype 59 შეიტანე ან მონიშნე იარლიყის ტიპი.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Fbrand 65 შეიტანე ან მონიშნე სასურველი სახეობა.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fhori 19c აჩვენებს მომიჯნავე იარლიყებს ან სავიზიტო ბარათების მარცხენა კიდეებს შორის მანძილს. თუ თქვენ განსაზღვრავთ ინდივიდუალურ ფორმატს,მნიშვნელობა მიუთითეთ აქ.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fleft 1c3 აჩვენებს მანძილს გვერდის მარცხენა ველიდან პირველი იარლიყის ან სავიზიტო ბარათის მარცხენა ველამდე. თუ თქვენ განსაზღვრავთ ინდივიდუალურ ფორმატს, მნიშვნელობა მიუთითეთ აქ.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Frows 104 შეიტანეთ იარლიყების ან სავიზიტო ბარათების ის რაოდენობა, რაც გსურთ რომ გასწვდეს გვერდის სიმაღლეს.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fsave a1 iიმახსოვრებს მიმდინარე იარლიყს ან სავიზიტო ბარათის ფორმატს.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fvert 218 აჩვენებს მანძილს იარლიყს ან სავიზიტო ბარათის ზედა კიდეებს შორის, და პირდაპირ ქვემოთ იარლიყის ან სავიზიტო ბარათის ზედა კიდეს შორის. თუ თქვენ განსაზღვრავთ ინდივიდუალურ ფორმატს, მნიშვნელობა მიუთითეთ აქ
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fwidth 139 აჩვენებს იარლიყის ან სავიზიტო ბარათის სიგანეს. თუ თქვენ განსაზღვრავთ ინდივიდუალურ ფორმატს, მნიშვნელობა მიუთითეთ აქ.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2FLabelFormatPage 79 დააყენეთ ქაღალდის ფორმატირების პარამეტრები.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fcols 101 შეიტანეთ იარლიყების ან სავიზიტო ბარათების ის რაოდენობა, რაც გსურთ რომ გასწვდეს გვერდის სიგანეს.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fheight 13c აჩვენებს იარლიყის ან სავიზიტო ბარათის სიმაღლეს. თუ თქვენ განსაზღვრავთ ინდივიდუალურ ფორმატს, მნიშვნელობა მიუთითეთ აქ.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Ftop 1bc აჩვენებს მანძილს გვერდის საწყისი გვერდიდან პირველი იარლიყის ან სავიზიტო ბარათის დასაწყისამდე. თუ თქვენ განსაზღვრავთ ინდივიდუალურ ფორმატს, მნიშვნელობა მიუთითეთ აქ.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffloatingsync%2Fsync 141 ზედა მარცხენა იარლიყის ან სავიზიტო ბარათის შიგთავსის გადაწერა გვერდზე დარჩენილ სხვა იარლიყებში ან სავიზიტო ბარათებში.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Frows 11d შეიტანეთ იარლიყების ან სავიზიტო ბარათების სტრიქონთა ის რაოდენობა, რაც გსურთ რომ მოთავსდეს თქვენს გვერდზე.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsynchronize af Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fcols 133 შეიტანეთ იარლიყების ან სავიზიტო ბარათების ის რაოდენობა, რომელიც გსურთ რომ თქვენი გვერდის თითო სტრიქტონში მოხვდეს.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsinglelabel 31 Prints a single label or business card on a page.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsetup 1f Opens the Printer Setup dialog.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fentirepage 30 Creates a full page of labels or business cards.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2FLabelOptionsPage 170 აყენებს დამატებით პარამეტრებს თქვენი იარლიყების ან სავიზიტო ბარათებისთვის ტექსტის სინქრონიზაციისა და პრინტერის პარამეტრების ჩათვლით.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 7d შეგიძლიათ შექმნათ საკუთარი სავიზიტო ბარათები.
1b HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 64 მონიშნეთ სასურველი ქაღალდის სახეობა.
1b HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 86 ბეჭდავს სავიზიტო ბარათებს ინდივიდუალურ ფურცელზე.
1a HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE dd Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
1a HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 74 ბეჭდავს სავიზიტო ბარათებს უწყვეტ ქაღალდზე.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Fautotext 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Ftreeview 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2FCardFormatPage 7a განსაზღვრეთ თქვენი სავიზიტო ბარათის იერსახე.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fmobile 74 შეიტანეთ თქვენი მობილური ტელეფონის ნომერი.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fphone 6e შეიტანეთ თქვენი სახლის ტელეფონის ნომერი.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname2 fc შეიტანეთ იმ პიროვნების ინიციალები, რომელიც გსურთ რომ გამოიყენოთ მეორე საკონტაქტო პიროვნებად.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname2 ed შეიტანეთ იმ პიროვნების გვარი, რომელიც გსურთ რომ გამოიყენოთ მეორე საკონტაქტო პიროვნებად.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Furl 67 შეიტანეთ თქვენი ვებგვერდის მისამართი.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fjob 67 შეიტანეთ თქვენი პროფესიის დასახელება.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fcountry 64 შეტანეთ საცხოვრებელი ქვეყნის სახელი.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname2 f0 შეიტანეთ იმ პიროვნების სახელი, რომელიც გსურთ რომ გამოიყენოთ მეორე საკონტაქტო პიროვნებად.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Furl 9c შეიტანეთ თქვენი კომპანიის ინტერნეტ ვებგვერდის მისამართი.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fphone 7a შეიტანეთ თქვენი სამსახურის ტელეფონის ნომერი.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 95 შეიტანეთ იმ ქვეყნის დასახელება, სადაც თქვენ საქმიანობთ.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fmobile 74 შეიტანეთ თქვენი მობილური ტელეფონის ნომერი.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fslogan 5e შეიტანეთ თქვენი კომპანიის სლოგანი.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany2 73 შეიტანეთ კომპანიის დამატებითი მონაცემები.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2FBusinessDataPage 1cd შეიცავს სავიზიტო ბარათების საკონტაქტო ინფორმაციას, სავიზიტო ბარათების სამუშაო კატეგორიის განლაგებით. სავიზიტო ბარათის განლაგება მონიშნულიასავიზიტო ბარათებისჩანართზე.
16 HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
2d fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Ffile_type 78 Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the folder.
14 HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
28 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fopen 1f Opens the selected document(s).
22 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fall 23 Click to delete all selected files.
2d fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Ffile_name 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fno 48 Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog.
15 .uno%3AOpenFromWriter 2d Opens a local or remote file, or imports one.
13 .uno%3AOpenFromCalc 2d Opens a local or remote file, or imports one.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_LEVELUP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
18 HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
36 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2FExplorerFileDialog 2d Opens a local or remote file, or imports one.
2e fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fnew_folder 15 Creates a new folder.
b .uno%3AOpen 2d Opens a local or remote file, or imports one.
14 HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
15 HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
18 HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fyes 3c Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog.
11 .uno%3AOpenRemote 32 Opens a document located in a remote file service.
19 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 81 შეიტანეთ ან მონიშნეთ სიაში მოცემული მდებარეობა.
14 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
33 SFX2%3ALISTBOX%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_DLG_LISTBOX 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc a2 პროგრამიდან გამოსვლის გარეშე ხურავს მიმდინარე დოკუმენტებს.
b .uno%3ASave 5a დაიმახსოვრე მიმდინარე დოკუმენტი.
11 .uno%3ASaveRemote 32 Saves a document located in a remote file service.
10 .uno%3ASaveACopy 41 Save a copy of the actual document with another name or location.
16 HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 1a0 მხოლოდ მონიშნული გრაფიკული ობიექტის ექსპორტი  %PRODUCTNAME დახატვა და სხვა ფორმატში გადატანა. თუ ეს სარკმელი შემოწმებული არ არის, მთლიანი დოკუმენტი ექსპორტირდება.
1d HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD d3 იცავს ფაილს პაროლით რომლის შეყვანაც ხდება მომხმარებლის მიერ ფაილის გახსნამდე.
1c HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 12d საშუალებას გაძლევთ დააყენოთ ელექტრონული ცხრილის დამახსოვრების პარამეტრები ზოგიერთი ტიპის მონაცემთა ფაილებში
13 HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE 32 იმახსოვრებს ფაილს.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
14 HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
35 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fconnect_to_server 7f Opens a dialog where you can set up connection to various types of servers, including WebDAV, FTP, SSH, Windows Share and CMIS.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
15 HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 86 მონიშნეთ ფაილის ფორმატი შესანახი დოკუმენტისთვის.
15 HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
1f SVT_HID_FILESAVE_PLACES_LISTBOX 49 Displays "favourite" places, i.e. shortcuts to local or remote locations.
1c HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 15 Creates a new folder.
14 HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL d0 შეიტანეთ ფაილის სახელი ან ფაილის მდებარეობა. თქვენ ასევე შეგიძლიათ შეიტანოთURL
f .uno%3AExportTo fa მიმდინარე დოკუმენტის სხვა სახელით და ფორმატით თქვენს მიერ განსაზღვრულ მდებარეობაში შენახვა
13 .uno%3AExportAsMenu 2a Export the document in PDF or EPUB formats
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 16a აჩვენებს მიმდინარე ფაილის თვისებებს, ისეთი სტატისტიკური მონაცემების ჩათვლით, როგორიცაა სიტყვების რაოდენობა და ფაილის შექმნის თარიღი.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fkeywords ad Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fsubject 12d შეიტანეთ დოკუმენტის თემა. შეგიძლიათ ერთი თემის გამოყენება მსგავსი შინაარსის მქონე დოკუმენტების დასაჯგუფებლად.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fcomments 7c კომენტარების შეტანა დოკუმენტის გამოსავლენად.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Ftitle 4e შეიტანეთ დოკუმენტის სათაური.
34 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2FDescriptionInfoPage 69 მოიცავს დოკუმენტის აღმწერ ინფორმაციას
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Freset 184 რედაქტირების დროის განულება, შექმნის თარიღის მიმდინარე თარიღსა და დროზე და ვერსიის ნომრის 1-ზე მისადგება. ასევე განახლებისა და ბეჭდვის თარიღებიც
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fuserdatacb 78 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fnameed 3e აჩვენებს ფაილის სახელს
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2FDocumentInfoPage 7d შეიცავს მიმდინარე ფაილის ძირითად ინფორმაციას.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fadd 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fproperties ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2FCustomInfoPage d0 საშუალებას გაძლევთ თქვენს დოკუმენტს მიანიჭოთ სასურველი საინფორმაციო ველები
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Fprotect d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Frecordchanges 56 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Freadonly 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2FSecurityInfoPage 2f Sets password options for the current document.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentfontspage%2FembedFonts 71 Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems.
30 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentfontspage%2FDocumentFontsPage 2a Embed  document fonts in the current file.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 132 შეგიძლიათ დაალაგოთ ან რედაქტირება გაუკეთოთ თქვენს შაბლონებს, ასევე, მიმდინარე ფაილები შეინახოთ შაბლონების სახით.
29 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fassign 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
28 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fadmin 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
2c svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatatable 2c Select the data table for your address book.
2d svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatasource 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2Fdefaultcb 36 The new template will be used as the default template.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2Fcategorylb 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2Fname_entry 1e Enter a name for the template.
33 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2FSaveAsTemplateDialog 29 Saves the current document as a template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate b2 ხსნის დიალოგს სადაც შეგიძლიათ მონიშნოთ შაბლონი რედაქტირებისთვის.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 1b8 ხსნის იარლიყების დიალოგის ფანჯარას სადაც შეგიძლიათ განსაზღვროთ თქვენი იარლიყების პარამეტრები და შემდეგ ქმნის ახალ ტექსტურ დოკუმენტს ამ იარლიყებისათვის ($[officename] Writer).
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 6c მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა გვერდების სანახავად..
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 86 For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 84 მომართავს კურსორს მონიშნული ტიპის წინა ობიექტზე.
c .uno%3APrint 18f ბეჭდავს მიმდინარე დოკუმენტს, ან წინასწარ განსაზღვრულ მონიშნულ დოკუმენტს. ასევე, შეგიძლიათ დააყენოთ ბეჭდვის პარამეტრები მიდმიანრე დოკუმენტისათვის.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox ec განსაზღვრავს სქოლიოებისა და კომენტარების ასახვის არეს, ასევე მათი დანომრვის ფორმატებს.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpaperspersheetlb 6c მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა გვერდების სანახავად..
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinttofile 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
27 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsingleprintjob a0 ხსნის მონაცემთა ბაზის ოსტატს მონაცემთა ფაილის შესაქმნელად.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 84 მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა ტექსტური ჩარჩოების სანახავად.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbtn 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcopycount 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 182 If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 61 ასახავს სტრიქონისStructure შემხსენებელს .
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderlb 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
1e vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsetup 6a Opens the printer properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 84 მომართავს კურსორს მონიშნული ტიპის წინა ობიექტზე.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fexpander 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 6c მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა გვერდების სანახავად..
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 8a მომართავს კურსორს მონიშნული ტიპის შემდეგ ობიექტზე.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinters f9 The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 7a მონიშნეთ ეს ხატულა შემხსენებლების სანახავად.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forientationlb 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Foptions af Opens the Printer Options dialog where you can override the global printer options set on the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print panel for the current document.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Fproperties 4f Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document.
24 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Fname 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
32 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2FPrinterSetupDialog 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 80 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 83 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu a5 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტის ასლის სხვადასხვა პროგრამებში გაგზავნა.
f .uno%3ASendMail 7e Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used.
15 HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
26 HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL 17a მიმდინარე Writer დოკუმენტიდან მთავარი დოკუმენტის შექმნა. საწყის დოკუმენტში  '1 სათაური' აბზაცის სტილის გამოჩენისას შეიქმნება ახალი ქვედოკუმენტი.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 2b Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fcompare 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fversions 148 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტის არსებული ვერსიების, მათი შექმნის თარიღის და დროის, ავტორისა და თანდართული კომენტარების ჩამონათვალი.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fdelete 3e მონიშნული ფაილის წაშლა
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fopen 8e მონიშნული ვერსიის მხოლოდ წასაკითხ ფანჯარაში გახსნა .
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Falways 110 დოკუმენტში ცვლილებების შეტანისას, $[officename] ავტომატურად იმახსოვრებს ახალ ვერსიას დოკუმენტის დახურვისას
36 sfx%2Fui%2Fversioncommentdialog%2FVersionCommentDialog 158 ახალი ვერსიის შენახვისას აქ შეიყვანეთ კომენტარი. თუ დააწკაპუნეთ ჩვენებას ამ დიალოგის გასახსნელად, კომენტარი არ დარედაქტირდება.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fshow 77 მონიშნული ვერსიის სრული კომენტარის ჩვენება.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fsave 19f მიმდინარე დოკუმენტის ახალი ვერსიის სახით დამახსოვრება.ახალი ვერსიის დამახსოვრებამდე შეგიძლიათ შეიტანოთ კომენტარები დიალოგშიI ვერსიის კომენტარის ჩასმა
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 183 ერთი და იმავე ფაილში მიმდინარე დოკუმენტის რამოდენიმე ვერსიის დამახსოვრება და ორგანიზება. შესაძლებელია წინა ვერსიები გახსნა, წაშლა და შედარება .
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 114 ყველაზე ბოლოს გახსნილი ფაილების ჩამონათალი. ჩამონათვალში ფაილის გასახსნელად დააწკაპუნეთ მის სახელზე.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
a .uno%3ACut 8e მონიშვნის ამოღება და ასლის გადატანა გაცვლის ბუფერზე.
b .uno%3ACopy 73 მონიშნულის ასლის გაცვლის ბუფერზე გადატანა
c .uno%3APaste 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmove_down 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fno_shift 0 
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fdivide 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmultiply 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsource 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsubtract 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fdatetime 0 
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fformats 0 
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmove_right 0 
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fadd 0 
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fnone 0 
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fobjects 0 
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Flist 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fnumbers 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fcomments 0 
d .uno%3ASelect c4 მიმდინარე ფაილის, ჩარჩოსა და ტექსტური ობიექტის სრული შიგთავსის მონიშვნა.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcols 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Frows 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnoformat 70 Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcalcsearchin 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchlist 50 Enter the text that you want to find, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
26 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace ba მოძიებული ტექსტის ან ფორმატის ჩანაცვლება და შემდეგი შეხვედრის ძებნა.
35 SVX%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 112 ძიების დოკუმენტში ტექსტის ან ფორმატის ყველა ნიმუშის პოვნა და მონიშვნა (მხოლოდ Writer-ში და Calc დოკუმენტებში).
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flabel3 5f Shows more or fewer search options. Click this label again to hide the extended search options.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fwholewords 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fallsheets 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslikebtn e6 იაპონურ ტექსტში გამოყენებული მსგავსი ნოტაციებისთვის საძიებო პარამეტრების დაყენება.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplaceall 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcase 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fregexp 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 3a Finds or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplacelist 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearch 67 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fselection 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
30 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace_backwards 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flayout c4 Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list.
2d svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcharwidth c9 ნახევარი სიგანისა და სრული სიგანის სიმბოლოების ფორმათა შორის განსხვავება.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fbacksearch 6b Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslike 1f9 საშუალებას გაძლევთ განსაზღვროთ საძიებო პარამეტრები იაპონურ ენაში გამოყენებული მსგავსი ნოტაციებისთვის. მონიშნეთ თოლია და დააწკაპუნეთ ღილაკზე  ... საძიებო პარამეტრების განსაზღვრის მიზნით.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fshorterfld 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Frelaxbox 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Flongerfld 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fotherfld 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilaritybtn 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilarity 8c Find terms that are similar to the Find text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Similarities button to define the similarity options.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsearchattrdialog%2FSearchAttrDialog 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fformat 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fmoveup 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fsave a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 90 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
19 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
11 HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
13 HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
10 HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
13 HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
1b HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
13 HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
16 HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fmovedown 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FBREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FAUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FCHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FTB_LINKS 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FUPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FMANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Fcategory 6c Lists the section that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section here.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Ffile 22 Lists the path to the source file.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Fapp 36 Lists the application that last saved the source file.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
2e cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fdefaultheight 25 Applies the default vertical spacing.
2d cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fdefaultwidth 27 Applies the default horizontal spacing.
3a cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2FInsertFloatingFrameDialog a9 Changes the properties of the selected floating frame. Floating frames work best when they contain an html document, and when they are inserted in another html document.
27 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fedname 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
2d cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fbuttonbrowse 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fedurl aa Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the Browse button and locate the file that you want to display.
29 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fborderon 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
2d cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fscrollbaroff 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
27 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fheight dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2e cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fscrollbarauto 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fborderoff 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
2c cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fscrollbaron 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fwidth e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
1b svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Furl 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Fcontainer 44 Displays the image map, so that you can click and edit the hotspots.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FImapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
1c svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Ftext 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FdescTV 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FframeCB a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Ftextentry 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Furlentry 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Fnameentry 1b Enter a name for the image.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FIMapDialog 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowchangesdialog%2FShowChangesDialog 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2Fedit 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2FCommentDialog 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriterdate 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriterdesc 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
33 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriteraction 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
2f svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcedit 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Frejectall 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
33 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcposition 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Facceptall 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Freject 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2f svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcdate 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcauthor 23 Lists the user who made the change.
32 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalccomment 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
33 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriterauthor 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Faccept 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2Fchanges b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
1a .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2FRedlineViewPage 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcaction 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
1a .uno%3ARejectTrackedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcommentedit 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcomment 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsimplerefdialog%2FSimpleRefDialog 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdotdotdot 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthorlist 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frange 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2FRedlineFilterPage 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdatecond 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frangeedit 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Factionlist 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Faction 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstarttime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fenddate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendtime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthor 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 46 To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
3c modules%2Fsbibliography%2Fui%2Fmappingdialog%2FMappingDialog a1 Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6a Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
11 SID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
3a modules%2Fsbibliography%2Fui%2Ftoolbar%2FTBC_BT_COL_ASSIGN 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 4b Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fbookmode 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumns 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1a svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2Fpage 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumnssb 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
19 svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2F100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1d svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2Foptimal 66 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at the moment the command is started.
1b svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2Fwidth 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
15 .uno%3AZoom100Percent 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fsinglepage 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fautomatic 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 89 Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button or press the Esc key.
14 HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility aa Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 4d Inserts a comment around the selected text or at the current cursor position.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
17 HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4e Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click Insert.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fsubsetlb 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
d .uno%3ABullet 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
16 HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
13 HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1b HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 49 Inserts an image into the current document centered on the page or slide.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 65 Inserts an embedded object into your document, including formulas, 3D models, charts and OLE objects.
23 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Furlbtn 3d Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open.
22 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Furled 5f Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search, to locate the file.
22 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Ftypes 34 Select the type of document that you want to create.
2b cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Fcreatefromfile 2c Creates an OLE object from an existing file.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Fcreatenew 42 Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 1a9 აქ უნდა ჩაურთოთ თქვენი მიმართვა ან მიმართული ველი მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში. მიმართვები მიმართვის ველებია იგივე დოკუმენტში ან ძირითადი დოკუმენტის ქვედოკუმენტში.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 56 The submenu presents various sources that an image, audio or video can be insert from.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctllanglb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2FCharNamePage 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 25 Select the color for the underlining.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinelb 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Ffontcolorlb 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 24 Select the color for the overlining.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Frelieflb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcommented 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatted 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fedit 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fengineering 56 With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fthousands 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcategorylb 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdenominatored 5e With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatlb 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Flanguagelb 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdecimalsed 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fadd 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcurrencylb 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fleadzerosed 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdelete 23 Deletes the selected number format.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fsourceformat 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fnegnumred 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Funvisitedlb b2 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles icon on the Formatting toolbar.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fvisitedlb b0 Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles icon on the Formatting toolbar.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fnameed 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Feventpb 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftargetfrmlb 71 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftexted 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furlpb 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furled 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsuperscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerningsb 42 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fraiselowersb 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
e .uno%3ASpacing 42 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fendbracket 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fstartbracket 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 7f Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckHangPunct 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckForbidList 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckApplySpacing 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FAsianTypography f2 Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcomboLB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 94 Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_FLINEINDENT 12a Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position".
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FParaIndentSpacing 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DELALL 80 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3c cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FParagraphTabsPage 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 67 Aligns the decimal separator of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadowcolorlb 1e Select a color for the shadow.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fdistancemf 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinecolorlb 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
1e cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fleftmf 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fpresets 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinestylelb 6b Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Frightmf 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2FBorderPage 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadows 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Ftopmf 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fbottommf 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fsync 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 71 Click a color. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting color. Click Automatic to reset a font color.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Farearb 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fpositionrb 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbrowse 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fshowpreview 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Flink 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbackgroundcolorset 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fselectlb 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftilerb 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2FBackgroundPage 24 Set the background color or graphic.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Ftextdirectionlb 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FParaAlignPage 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Forigsize 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2FCropPage 5c Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fheightzoom 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fheight 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fleft 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fright 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fkeepscale 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Ftop 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fwidthzoom 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fkeepsize 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fwidth 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fbottom 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fdesc 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fcategory 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Flinkedwith 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fautoupdate b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnextstyle 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnamerw a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2FManageStylePage 27 Set the options for the selected style.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboLayoutFormat 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonHorz 0 
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckRegisterTrue 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargBot 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FPageFormatPage 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageFormat 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageLayout 0 
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonPortrait 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinWidth 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinHeight 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonLandscape 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonVert 0 
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboTextFlowBox 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPaperTray ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargLeft e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckAdaptBox 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboRegisterStyle 0 
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargTop 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargRight e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonEdit 0 
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FHFFormatPage 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinHeight 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckHeaderOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameLR 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonMore 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameFP 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargLeft 60 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin and the left edge of the header.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargRight 62 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right page margin and the right edge of the header.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinSpacing 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
2f svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckDynSpacing 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckAutofit 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
19 SVX_HID_FOOTER_BUTTONMORE 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
12 HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 0 
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FHFFormatPage 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
1b SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINMARGLEFT 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
1b SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKAUTOFIT 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
1a SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKSAMELR 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
1a SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKSAMEFP 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
1c SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINMARGRIGHT 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckFooterOn 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
1e SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKDYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
1a SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINSPACING 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
19 SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINHEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 88 Changes the case of characters in the selection. If the cursor is within a word and no text is selected, then the word is the selection.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected Western characters to an uppercase character.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected Western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 40 Changes the selected Western characters to lowercase characters.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected Western characters.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected Western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected Western characters to an uppercase character.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected Western characters.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 40 Changes the selected Western characters to uppercase characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstyles 5e Opens the Styles deck of the Sidebar where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstylelb 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fpositionlb 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fadjustlb 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight4ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft4ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 34 Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fprop 27 Splits cells into rows of equal height.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fvert 63 Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fhori 60 Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2FSplitCellsDialog 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fcountnf 55 Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter f0 შეიყვანეთ სივრცის რაოდენობა გვერდის ზედა კიდისა და მიამართთა ნაკრების ქვედა კიდეს შორის.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
12 .uno%3ALineSpacing 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2Fstylename 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstringinput%2Fedit 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
18 HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fdesc_entry e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fobject_title_entry 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2FObjectTitleDescDialog 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_EDGE_STYLE 91 Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
2a cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLineTabPage 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_CAP_STYLE 52 Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.
21 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
c HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fnamedialog%2FNameDialog d Enter a name.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLineEndPage 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtnhatch 3f Fills the object with a hatching pattern selected on this page.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtnpattern 47 Fills the object with a simple two color pattern selected on this page.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtnbitmap 3d Fills the object with a bitmap pattern selected on this page.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtngradient 37 Fills the object with a gradient selected on this page.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtncolor 34 Fills the object with a color selected on this page.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtnnone 20 Do not fill the selected object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FAreaTabPage 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fadd 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2FGradientPage 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterxmtr cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fmodify 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradienttypelb 2b Select the gradient that you want to apply.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterymtr c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fanglemtr 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfrommtr 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortomtr 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfromlb 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fbordermtr 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortolb 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fmodify 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fadd 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinecolorlb 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinetypelb 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglemtr 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdistancemtr 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2FHatchPage 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBitmapTabPage 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FLB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FTSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FShadowTabPage 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
35 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
34 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FTransparencyTabPage 50 Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
31 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
37 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FLB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FULL_WIDTH 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTextAttributesPage 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_CONTOUR 54 Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FPositionAndSize 25 Resizes or moves the selected object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_POSRECT f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_SIZERECT 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_ANGLE 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FNF_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_RECT 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FRotation 1c Rotates the selected object.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FSlantAndCornerRadius 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Foptimal 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Flength 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Fposition 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Fspacing 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Fvalueset 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistancey 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fvertical 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Findent 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fslant a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcontour 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistance 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fautosize 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcenter 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Ftextcontour 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fright 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 66 Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.
16 HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistancex 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fvert 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Foff 1c Removes baseline formatting.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Frotate 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fupright 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcolor 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fnoshadow 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fhori 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fleft 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Forientation 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTextAnimation 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FLB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
2d cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FNUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2Fdefault c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2Fvalue 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2FRowHeightDialog 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2Fdefault 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2Fvalue 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2FColWidthDialog 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckHyphActive 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckAsianMode 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckVertStack 17 Aligns text vertically.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Freferences 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinDegrees a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Fdialcontrol 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FCellAlignPage 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft 2c Aligns the contents of the cell to the left.
13 .uno%3AAlignVCenter 2f Sets the text orientation of the cell contents.
11 .uno%3AAlignBlock 4a Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 2d Aligns the contents of the cell to the right.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxHorzAlign 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinIndentFrom 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckWrapTextAuto 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxVertAlign 33 Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckShrinkFitCellSize aa Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks.
f .uno%3AAlignTop 3e Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
17 HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
18 HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdoublesided 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
2b svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Finvertnormals 19 Inverts the light source.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fgeometry 108 Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdiagonal 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fscaleddepth 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fhori 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fangle 45 Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fveri 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fobjspecific 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdoublesidedillum 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fflat 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdepth 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fspherical 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ffocal 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdistance 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fslant 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fshadow 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fmode 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Frepresentation 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fambientcolor 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flightcolor1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flight8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flight 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcircley 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexfilter 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexture 11f Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftextype 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexreplace 24 Applies the texture without shading.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexmodulate 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexobjx 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexobjy 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcolor 1e Converts the texture to color.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexparallelx 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcirclex 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexparallely 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fintensity 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fspeccolor 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fillumcolor 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fobjcolor 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ffavorites 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fmaterial 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhornone 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhorleft 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fvernone 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhordistance 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhorcenter 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhorright 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fverdistance 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fvertop 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fverbottom 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fvercenter 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fundo 74 Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fchange 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignoreall 7e Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignorerule 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fchangeall 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
f .uno%3ASpelling 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Foptions 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignore 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fadd 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2FSpellingDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fcheckgrammar 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fsentence 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fsuggestionslb 82 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Correct or Correct All.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Flanguagelb 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 40 Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Feditterms 51 Opens the Edit Dictionary dialog where you can edit the list of conversion terms.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Fcommonterms a3 Converts words with two or more characters that are in the list of common terms. After the list is scanned, the remaining text is converted character by character.
32 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Ftotraditional b3 Converts simplified Chinese text characters to traditional Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted.
31 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Ftosimplified b3 Converts traditional Chinese text characters to simplified Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted.
3c svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2FChineseConversionDialog 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fdelete 3c Removes the selected user-defined entry from the dictionary.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fmodify 2e Saves the modified entry to the database file.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fterm 3e Enter the text that you want to replace with the Mapping term.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fmapping 36 Enter the text that you want to replace the Term with.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Freverse 62 Automatically adds the reverse mapping direction to the list for each modification that you enter.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fsimpletotrad 33 Converts simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Ftradtosimple 33 Converts traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fadd 77 Adds the term to the conversion dictionary. If the term is already in the dictionary, the new term receives precedence.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fproperty 27 Defines the class of the selected term.
36 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2FChineseDictionaryDialog 22 Edit the Chinese conversion terms.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Freplaceed af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Falternatives c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fwordcb b6 Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor5 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftol4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx5 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 af Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Freplace 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fpipette a5 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate b2 ხსნის დიალოგს სადაც შეგიძლიათ მონიშნოთ შაბლონი რედაქტირებისთვის.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2Fedit 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2FApplyAutoFmtPage 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftextonly 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnewtext f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Forigtext 272 Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type. Wildcard character sequence .* in the end of word results the replacement of the word before arbitrary suffixes, too. Wildcard character sequence .* before the word results the replacement after arbitrary prefixes, too. For example, the pattern "i18n.*" with the replacement text "internationalization" finds and replaces "i18ns" with "internationalizations", or the pattern ".*..." with the replacement text "…" finds and replaces three dots in "word..." with the typographically correct precomposed Unicode horizontal ellipsis ("word…").
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftabview 13b Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
20 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnew 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
2c cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2FAcorReplacePage 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautodouble 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdouble ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewdouble 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrevlist 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdoublelist b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrev d3 Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Flang 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
2a cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2FAcorExceptPage 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultdouble 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2FApplyLocalizedPage 72 Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Flist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fchecklist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fsinglereplace 83 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartsingle 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartdouble 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fendsingle 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoublereplace 83 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fenddouble 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultsingle 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
12 HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR ad To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
17 HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fspellmenu%2Fignoreall 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fspellmenu%2Fadd 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
17 HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fspellmenu%2Fspelldialog 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
11 HID_LINGU_REPLACE 66 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fdelete 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fmaxentries 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fwhenclosing f7 When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fentries ed Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Facceptwith 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fcollectwords 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fshowastip 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fminwordlen 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fappendspace 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fenablewordcomplete 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2Fproperties 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2Fmain 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2FSmartTagOptionsPage 56 When you have installed at least one Smart Tag extension, you see the Smart Tags page.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2Fvalueset 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2FPickBulletPage 38 Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2Fvalueset 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2FPickNumberingPage 3b Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2Fvalueset 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
11 .uno%3ASetOutline 8e Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2FPickOutlinePage 8e Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Flinkgraphics 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Fvalueset 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2FPickGraphicPage 4f Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Forientlb 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fkeepratio 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fheightmf 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Flevellb 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fprefix 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fnumfmtlb 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsuffix a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fcolor 2f Select a color for the current numbering style.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Frelsize 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fstartat 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbullet 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbitmap 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fwidthmf 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentatmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumdistmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Falignedatmf 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentatmf 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumfollowedbylb 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fatmf 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Fedit 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Fcreate 15 Creates a new script.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2FScriptOrganizerDialog 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
2a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fimport 144 მიუთითეთ იმ ძირითადი $[officename] ბიბილიოტეკის ადგილმდებარეობა რომელიც გინდათ დაამატოტ მიმდინარე სიაში და დააწკაპუნეთ გახსნა.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fnewlibdialog%2FNewLibDialog 1c Enter a name for the script.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Fnewdialog 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 28 Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Frun 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fassign 6e Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event.
31 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fedit 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Fdelete 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
11 HID_BASICIDE_LIBS 1fb ჩამოთვლის ბიბლიოთეკის და მოდულების სიას სადაც შეგიძლიათ გახსნათ ან დაიმახსოვროთ თქვენი მაკრო. განსაკუთერებულ დოკუმენტიან მაკროს დასამახსოვრებლად, გახსენი დოკუმენტი და მერე მისი დიალოგი.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacros 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Frun 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
2b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Flibrary 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
2b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Fedit 84 ხსნის არჩეულ მაკროს ან დიალოგს რედაქტირებისთვის.
2d BASCTL_PUSHBUTTON_RID_MACROCHOOSER_RID_PB_ORG 167 ხსნის მაროს მმართველიდიალოგურ ფანჯარას ,სადაც თქვენ შეძლებთ დაამატოთ,არედაქტიროდ ან წაშალოდ არჩეული მაროს მოდულები და ბიბლიოთეკები.
28 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fedit d4 ხსნის ძირითად $[officename] რედაქტორს იმისთვის რომ შეძლოთ შეცვალოთ არჩეული ბიბლიოთეკა.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Frename 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Fnewmodule 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
2d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Fdelete 57 Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Flocation 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
2e modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Flibrary 26 Lists the existing macros and dialogs.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fpassword 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
27 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fnew 16 Creates a new library.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FnewpassEntry 77 შეიყვანეთ არჩეული ბიბლიოთეკის ახალი პაროლი.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FPasswordDialog 5b იცავს არჩეულ ბიბლიოთეკას პაროლით.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2Freplace c3 ცვლის ბიბლიოთეკას რომელსაც აქვს იგივე სახელი რაც მიმდინარე ბიბლიოთეკას.
2f modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2Fref 146 ამატებს არჩეულ ბიბლიოთეკას როგორც მხოლოდ წაკითხვად ფაილს. ბიბლიოთეკა ხელახლა იტვირთება ყოველი ახალი გაშვების მერე  %PRODUCTNAME.
3b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2FImportLibDialog 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fsavein 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fmodify 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fup 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fadd 7d Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fentries 6c Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fdown 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fmenuedit 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Ftoplevelbutton 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Ftoplevellist 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2FMenuAssignPage 47 Customizes and saves current menu layouts as well as creates new menus.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fmovemenu%2Fmenuname 76 Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fmovemenu%2FMoveMenuDialog 6e Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button.
22 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Freset 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
2c cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2FAccelConfigPage 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fchange 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Foffice 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
21 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fsave 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fmodule 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fdelete 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
26 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fshortcuts be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
25 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fcategory 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
25 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Ffunction dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fkeys 46 Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function.
21 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fload 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
17 CUI_HID_SVX_RESETBUTTON 54 Restores the selected toolbar to its original state after you agree to the question.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
15 CUI_HID_SVX_DESCFIELD 32 Displays a short description of the given command.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
19 CUI_HID_SVX_ADD_SEPARATOR 39 Inserts a separator line under the current toolbar entry.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 72 Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add to insert the command into the Customize dialog.
1f HID_SVX_CONFIG_TOOLBAR_CONTENTS 5c Displays a list of commands for the selected toolbar of the current application or document.
18 CUI_HID_SVX_REMOVEBUTTON 3a Deletes the selected command without any further question.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_CONFIG_TOOLBAR 2a Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars.
18 CUI_HID_SVX_ICONSANDTEXT 15 Shows icons and text.
1b CUI_HID_SVX_TOPLEVELLISTBOX 24 Select the toolbar you want to edit.
14 CUI_HID_SVX_TEXTONLY 10 Shows text only.
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 70 Opens the Name dialog, where you can enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2Fedit 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
1b CUI_HID_SVX_UP_TOOLBAR_ITEM 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
15 CUI_HID_SVX_ICONSONLY 11 Shows icons only.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
1d CUI_HID_SVX_DOWN_TOOLBAR_ITEM 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FdeleteButton 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FimportButton 99 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FIconSelector 99 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2Fdelete 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fevents b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2Fassign 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2FMacroAssignPage 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fsavein 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
1e CUI_HID_MACRO_HEADERTABLISTBOX b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassigndialog%2FMacroAssignDialog 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2Fassignments b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fmacro 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fdelete 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fdelete 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fedit 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnew 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fsave 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
33 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fdescription 1b Enter a comment (optional).
31 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fextension 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
35 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Finterfacename 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Ffiltername 3c Select the application that you want to use with the filter.
3f filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2FXmlFilterTabPageGeneral 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltimport 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltexport 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Ftempimport 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fdoc 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowsetemp 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
4d filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2FXmlFilterTabPageTransformation 31 Enter or edit file information for an XML filter.
21 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
21 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
29 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
22 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
21 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
1c HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
1c HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
1e HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1b HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
1b HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2FHangulHanjaOptDialog 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
34 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_CB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
33 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_CB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
1a HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
14 HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
1a HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
1e HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
2f SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_PB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
3d SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_CB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
33 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_LB_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
42 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
3d SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
42 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fautoreplaceunique 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fshowrecentfirst 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fignorepost 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fedit 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fdelete 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaadddialog%2Fentry 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fnew 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaadddialog%2FHangulHanjaAddDialog ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fdelete 1b Deletes the selected entry.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fnew 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fedit1 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Foriginal 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fbook 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fremove 68 Removes the selected signature from the list. Removes all subsequent signatures as well, in case of PDF.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fsign 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fview 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
35 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fadescompliant 4e Prefers creating XAdES signatures for ODF and OOXML, PAdES signatures for PDF.
32 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fsignatures 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
3f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2FDigitalSignaturesDialog 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FUPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
25 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FINSTALL 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FDESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdateinstalldialog%2FUpdateInstallDialog ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FUpdateDialog ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 89 Inserts an invisible optional hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 6c Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks like non-breaking space, soft hyphen, and optional break.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
e .uno%3AGallery 70 Opens the Gallery deck of the Sidebar, where you can select images and audio clips to insert into your document.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fpreview 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Faddall 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fadd 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
13 HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 28 Displays a preview of the selected file.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffindfiles 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffiles 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffiletype 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
b .uno%3Axxxx 75 Toggle the visibility of grid points and guide lines to help object moving and precise position in the current sheet.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 45 Displays the snap lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 45 Displays the snap lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
17 .uno%3AHelplinesVisible 45 Displays the snap lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
25 vnd.sun.star.findbar%3AFocusToFindbar 5f Toggle the visibility of the Find toolbar to search for text or navigate a document by element.
e .uno%3ASidebar a4 The Sidebar is a vertical graphical user interface that primarily provides contextual properties, style management, document navigation, and media gallery features.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or audio file into your document.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 1f Installs the downloaded update.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 1c Continues a paused download.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 3b Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
26 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fuser 42 Filter extensions only available for the currently logged in user.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fshared 3b Filter extensions available for all users of this computer.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2FExtensionManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
2f desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fgetextensions 33 You can find a collection of extensions on the Web.
2b desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fupdatebtn de Click to check for online updates of all installed extensions. To check for updates of the selected extension only, choose the Update command from the context menu. The check for availability of updates starts immediately.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fextensions 7b Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Faddbtn 1e Click Add to add an extension.
2b desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fremovebtn 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
34 desktop%2Fui%2Fshowlicensedialog%2FShowLicenseDialog 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_ENABLE 44 Select the extension that you want to enable, and then click Enable.
29 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fbundled a9 Bundled extensions are installed by the system administrator using the operating system specific installer packages. These can not be installed, updated or removed here.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 46 Select the extension that you want to disable, and then click Disable.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Foptionsbtn 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fexpander 3c ჩაურთავს რიგს ცხრილში.
26 uui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FconfirmpassEntry 16 Re-enter the password.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 16 Re-enter the password.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 16 Re-enter the password.
22 uui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FnewpassEntry 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass2ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass1ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
27 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FPasswordDialog 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 1d Re-enter the master password.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 55 Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords.
39 uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2FSetMasterPasswordDialog 43 Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fsafemodedialog%2FSafeModeDialog b0 Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance.
1f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Ftsa 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Flocation 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fpassword 60 Enter the password used for protecting the private key associated with the selected certificate.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fpdfsignpage 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablecopy 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangecomment 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeform 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeinsdel 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprinthigh 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fselect 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintnone 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2FPdfSecurityPage 2c პაროლის შეყვანა.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopenpdf c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fformat 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintlow 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fresolution 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fcontact 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Feffects 4c Select to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpageonly 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablea11y 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fallowdups 9c Allows you to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fdefault 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fthumbs 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Ftoolbar 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeany 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fcomments 44 Select to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
27 FILTER_EDIT_RID_PDF_EXPORT_DLG_ED_PAGES 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpdfa ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2FPdfViewPage 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fembed 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexporturl 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fall 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpages 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fforms 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fsinglelayout 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fopen 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Freduceresolution 50 Select to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Ftagged 46 Select to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fjpegcompress ca Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fbookmarks ef Select to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Chapter Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontfacinglayout 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fselection 1e Exports the current selection.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2FPdfLinksPage 145 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows you to link to those objects by name from other documents.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Flosslesscompress 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpage 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangenone 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Foutline 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Femptypages 191 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fcert 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fquality 2d Enter the quality level for JPEG compression.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Frange 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitdefault b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwin 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwidth 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblelevel 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitvis 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopeninternet 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fconvert d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fdefaultlayout 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffirstonleft 101 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fdisplay 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2FPdfUserInterfacePage 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontlayout 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fresize 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fcenter 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fsetpassword 2c პაროლის შეყვანა.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fmenubar 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexport 145 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows you to link to those objects by name from other documents.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fwindow 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
34 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblebookmark 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Freason 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fallbookmarks 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF a6 Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
23 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2Fcancel 2d Does not allow macros in the document to run.
1f uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2Fok 25 Allows macros in the document to run.
2c uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FviewSignsButton 30 Opens a dialog where you can view the signature.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FalwaysTrustCheckbutton 3d Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources.
2c uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FMacroWarnMedium 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2Fdescription 21 Type a purpose for the signature.
30 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2Fviewcert 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
32 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2Fsignatures 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
3f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2FSelectCertificateDialog 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
25 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsbutton 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelslist 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsedit 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
20 svx%2Fui%2Faddmodeldialog%2Fname 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsadd 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsremove 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2FDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesdetails 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
1d svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2Fitems 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
1f svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2Ftoolbar 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesadd 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstances 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesedit 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
22 svx%2Fui%2Faddmodeldialog%2Fmodify d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesremove 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fcalculate 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Freadonly 1f Declares the item as read-only.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frelevant 1e Declares the item as relevant.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fname 1b Enter the name of the item.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fconstraint 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2FAddDataItemDialog 48 Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fvalue 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fdatatype 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frequiredcond 1e Declares the item as relevant.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fconstraintcond 1f Declares the item as read-only.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frequired 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Freadonlycond 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frelevantcond 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
24 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fedit 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
29 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fcondition 12 Enter a condition.
32 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2FAddConditionDialog 5b Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fdelete 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fedit 1d Edits the selected namespace.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fadd 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fnamespaces 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f3 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 15c დააწკაპუნეთ ამობეჭდეთ ფაილი პირდაპირ ხატულას მოცემული დოკუმენტის ამოსაბეჭდად პრინტერის ამჟამინდელი სტანდარტული პარამეტრებით.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee 268 სვამს ჰორიზონტალური მიმართულების ანიმირებულ ტექსტს მოცემულ დოკუმენტში. გადაიტანეთ ტექსტური ველი, და შემდეგ დაბეჭდეთ ან ჩასვით სასურველი ტექსტი. ანიმაციური ეფექტის განსაზღვრის მიზნით, აირჩიეთ ფორმატი - ტექსტი - ტექსტური ანიმაცია.
f .uno%3ADrawText e1 Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 14a Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 18c დააწკაპუნეთ რომ გახსნათ ან დახუროთ ხატვა ზოლი, რომლითაც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ მოცემულ დოკუმენტში ფორმების, ხაზების, ტექსტისა და მიმნიშნებლების დამატება.
e .uno%3AEllipse 22e ხაზავს ოვალს, სადაც გადაგაქვთ მოცემული დოკუმენტი. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილს, სადაც გსურთ ოვალის მოხაზვა, და გადაიტანეთ თქვენთვის სასურველ ზომაში. წრის მოსახაზად, დააჭირეთ და არ აუშვათ Shift ღილაკს გადატანის პროცესში.
b .uno%3ALine 18a ავლებს სწორ ხაზს, სადაც თქვენ გადაიტანთ მოცემულ დოკუმენტს. ხაზის 45 გრადუსამდე შეზღუდვის მიზნით, დააჭირეთ და არ გაუშვათ Shift ღილაკს გადატანის პროცესში.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 4dc ხაზავს ზოლს, რომელიც სრულდება მართკუთხედი მიმნიშნებელით, ტექსტის ჰორიზონტალური მიმართულებით, საიდანაც გადაგაქვთ მოცემულ დოკუმენტში. მიმნიშნებლის ზომის შესაცვლელად, გადაიტანეთ მისი სახელური. ტექსტის დასამატებლად, დააწკაპუნეთ მიმნიშნებლის კიდეს და შემდეგ დაბეჭდეთ ან ჩასვით სასურველი ტექსტი. მართკუთხედი მიმნიშნებლის მომრგვალებული მიმნიშნებლით შესაცვლელად, გადაიტანეთ ყველაზე დიდი კუთხის სახელური როდესაც ისრის გამოსახულება ხელის გამოსახულებით შეიცვლება.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 3d0 ხაზავს გლუვ Bezier მრუდს. დააწკაპუნეთ იქ, სადაც გსურთ მრუდის დაწყება, გადაიტანეთ, გაუშვით, და შემდეგ გადაიტანეთ ისარი იქ, სადაც გსურთ მრუდის დასრულება და დააწკაპუნეთ. გადაიტანეთ ისარი და კვლავ დააწკაპუნეთ მრუდისთვის სწორი ხაზის სეგმენტის დასამატებლად. მრუდის ხაზვის დასასრულებლად ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ. დახურული ფორმის შესაქმნელად ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ მრუდის საწყის პუნქტს.
b .uno%3ARect 27a ხაზავს მართკუთხედს, სადაც გადაგაქვთ მოცემული დოკუმენტი. კვადრატის მოსახაზად, დააჭირეთ და არ აუშვათ Shift ღილაკს გადატანის პროცესში. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილს, სადაც გსურთ მართკუთხედის კუთხის მოთავსება, და გადაიტანეთ თქვენთვის სასურველ ზომაში.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 342 ხაზავს  სწორი ხაზის სეგმენტების სერიისგან შემდგარ ზოლს. გადაიტანეთ ხაზის სეგმენტის მოსახაზად, დააწკაპუნეთ ხაზის სეგმენტის ბოლო პუნქტის მოსანიშნად, და შემდეგ გადაიტანეთ ახალი ხაზის სეგმენტის მოსახაზად. ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ ხაზის დასასრულებლად. დახურული ფორმის შესაქმნელად ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ ხაზის საწყის პუნქტს.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 4a5 ხაზავს ამოვსებულ ფორმას, რომელსაც განსაზღვრავს წრის რკალი და მოცემულ დოკუმენტში არსებული დიამეტრის ხაზი. წრის სეგმენტის მოსახაზად, გადაიტანეთ წრე თქვენთვის სასურველ ზომაში და შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ დიამეტრის ხაზის საწყისი პუნქტის მოსანიშნად. გადაიტანეთ ისარი იქ, სადაც გსურთ დიამეტრის ხაზის ბოლო პუნქტის მოთავსება და დააწკაპუნეთ. წრეზე დაწკაპუნება საჭირო არ არის. ელიფსის სეგმენტის მოსახაზად, დააჭირეთ და არ აუშვათ Shift ღილაკს გადატანის პროცესში.
a .uno%3AArc 398 ხაზავს რკალს მოცემულ დოკუმენტში. რკალის მოსახაზად, გადაიტანეთ ოვალი თქვენთვის სასურველ ზომაში, და შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ რკალის საწყისი პუნქტის მოსანიშნად. გადაიტანეთ ისარი იქ, სადაც გსურთ ბოლო პუნქტის დასმა და დააწკაპუნეთ. ოვალზე  დაწკაპუნება საჭირო არ არის. წრეზე დაფუძნებული ოვალის მოსახაზად, დააჭირეთ და არ აუშვათ Shift ღილაკს გადატანის პროცესში.
a .uno%3APie 4b8 ხაზავს ამოვსებულ ფორმას, რომელსაც განსაზღვრავს ოვალის რკალი და მოცემულ დოკუმენტში არსებული ორი რადიუსის ხაზი. ელიფსის რგოლური დიაგრამის მოსახაზად, გადაიტანეთ ოვალი თქვენთვის სასურველ ზომაში და შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ პირველი რადიუსის ხაზის მოსანიშნად. გადაიტანეთ ისარი იქ, სადაც გსურთ მეორე რადიუსის ხაზის მოთავსება და დააწკაპუნეთ. ოვალზე დაწკაპუნება საჭირო არ არის. წრის რგოლური დიაგრამის მოსახაზად, დააჭირეთ და არ აუშვათ Shift ღილაკს გადატანის პროცესში.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled 1d6 ხაზავს ღია ფორმის ზოლს, სადაც გადაგაქვთ მოცემული დოკუმენტი. ზოლის დასასრულებლად აუშვით თაგუნას ღილაკს. დახურული ფორმის მოსახაზად, აუშვით თაგუნას ღილაკს ზოლის საწყის პუნქტთან.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 1e Opens the Form Design toolbar.
d .uno%3AConfig 55 The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 23 ქმნის თოლიას.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 42 ქმნის ფორმატირებულ ველს.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 39 ქმნის დასაჭერ ღილაკს.
b .uno%3AEdit 33 ქმნის ტექსტურ ველს.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 3f ქმნის არჩევანის ღილაკს.
e .uno%3AListBox 13 Creates a list box.
f .uno%3AComboBox 2d ქმნის კომბო-ველს.
c .uno%3ALabel 52 ქმნის ტექსტის საჩვენებელ ველს.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 20 Opens the More Controls toolbar.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted a2 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ფორმატირებულ ველად.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 9c შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ნუმერაციულ ველად.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 8d შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება დროის ველად.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 93 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ვალუტის ველად.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 93 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება თარიღის ველად.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 96 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება შაბლონის ველად.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 14e იძახებს ქვე-მენიუს, სადაც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ აირჩიოთ სამართავი ღილაკის ტიპი დოკუმენტში არჩეული სამართავი ღილაკის შესაცვლელად.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl e0 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება გრაფიკული გამოსახულების სამართავ ღილაკად.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 93 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ტექსტურ ველად.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 86 შერჩეული სამართავი გარდაიქმნება ტექსტურ ღილაკად.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 80 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება თოლიად.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 93 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ტექსტურ ველად.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio ac შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ერთი არჩევანის ღილაკად.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 8d შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება კომბო-ველად.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 86 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება იარლიყად.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 96 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება ფაილის არჩევად.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn c7 შერჩეული სამართავი ღილაკი გარდაიქმნება გრაფიკული გამოსახულების ღილაკად.
14 SID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 5b იძახებს სვეტების ჩვენება დიალოგს.
e SID_FM_HIDECOL 3c მალავს მონიშნულ სვეტს.
12 SID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 82 დააწკაპუნეთ ყველა თუ გსურთ ყველა სვეტის ჩვენება.
f SID_FM_SHOWCOLS 100 იძახებს ქვე-მენიუს, სადაც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ სვეტების მონიშვნა მათი განმეორებითი ჩვენების მიზნით.
10 SID_FM_DELETECOL 56 შლის ამ მომენტში მონიშნულ სვეტს.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fshowcoldialog%2FShowColDialog 7e In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple entries.
10 SID_FM_CHANGECOL 128 ხსნის ქვე-მენიუს მონაცემთა ველის მოსანიშნად, ცხრილის სამართავ ღილაკში მონიშნული მონაცემთა ველის შესაცვლელად.
10 SID_FM_INSERTCOL dc იძახებს ქვე-მენიუს ცხრილის სამართავ ღილაკში ჩასასმელ მონაცემთა ველის მოსანიშნად.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties c1 იძახებს დიალოგს მონიშნული სამართავი ღილაკის პარამეტრების შესაცვლელად.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
13 HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 5e For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.
d HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
12 HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
12 HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
15 HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
17 HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
13 HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 59 Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.
17 HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 73 The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 16 Sets the default date.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 5e Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar.
18 HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
18 HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
1c HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
19 HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1b HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
18 HID_PROP_DEFAULT_CHECKED 42 Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
11 HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
16 HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
d HID_PROP_NAME 9f On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.
19 HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
19 HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
10 HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
15 HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
10 HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
11 HID_PROP_TRISTATE 163 განსაზღვრავს შეუძლია თუ არა თოლიას ასევე წარმოადგინოს დაკავშირებული მონაცემთა ბაზის ZERO მნიშვნელობები, TRUE და FALSE მნიშვნელობების გარდა.
c HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
17 HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 105 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
12 HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
15 HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT e5 თუ მკაცრი ფორმატის ფუნქცია აქტივირებულია (დიახ), მიიღება მხოლოდ დასაშვები სიმბოლოები.
14 HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
d HID_PROP_SPIN 152 "დიახ" პარამეტრი სამართავი ღილაკის ველს გარდაქმნის მბრუნავ ღილაკად, სადაც ემატება შესაბამისი ისრის გამოსახულებიანი ღილაკები.
10 HID_PROP_TABSTOP 54 The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
15 HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 125 განსაზღვრავს გამოჩნდება თუ არა პირველი სვეტი ველის იარლიყებით, რომელშიც მოცემული ჩანაწერი აღნიშნულია ისრით.
12 HID_PROP_PRINTABLE cd უთითებს გსურთ თუ არა სამართავი ღილაკის ველის გამოჩენა ამობეჭდილ დოკუმენტში.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
12 HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 21 Determines spin button intervals.
10 HID_PROP_ENABLED 177 თუ სამართავი ღილაკის ველს აქვს პარამეტრი "აქტივირებული" (თანხმობა), ფორმის მომხმარებელს საშუალება ექნება გამოიყენოს სამართავი ღილაკის ველი.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 50 Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 16 Sets the default time.
15 HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 8f განსაზღვრავს წყაროს სამართავი ღილაკის იარლიყისთვის.
e HID_PROP_LABEL 55 The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 65 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look.
13 HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 7d მიუთითეთ თარიღის წაკითხვის სასურველი ფორმატი.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
f HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
12 HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
11 HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 108 იძლევა დახმარების ტექსტის შეყვანის საშუალებას, რომელიც სამართავ ღილაკზე რჩევის სახით გამოჩნდება.
e HID_PROP_WIDTH a6 განსაზღვრავს სვეტის სიგანეს ცხრილის სამართავი ღილაკის ველში.
13 HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
15 HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 84 კომბო-ველს ანიჭებს ავტომატური შევსების ფუნქციას.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 6c Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control.
13 HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 54 Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
47 modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Flabelselectiondialog%2FLabelSelectionDialog 115 მონიშნეთ მინიჭების გარეშე უჯრა სამართავ ღილაკსა და მინიჭებულ იარლიყის ველს შორის კავშირის მოსაშლელად.
15 HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY b1 განსაზღვრავს გამეორებულ მოვლენებს შორის შეფერხებას მილიწამებში.
f HID_PROP_REPEAT 7d Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
18 HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
12 HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 184 გრაფიკული გამოსახულებები პარამეტრი უთითებს იმ გრაფიკული გამოსახულების ადგილმდებარეობას და ფაილის დასახელებას, რომლის ჩვენებაც გსურთ ღილაკზე.
11 HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
15 HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
15 HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
10 HID_PROP_HELPURL 1aa განსაზღვრავს ჯგუფის იარლიყს URL მისამართის მართლწერაში, რომელიც უთითებს დახმარების დოკუმენტზე და რომლის გამოძახება შესაძლებელია სამართავი ღილაკის მეშვეობით.
11 HID_PROP_TABINDEX 75 The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
10 HID_PROP_HSCROLL 98 ამატებს თქვენს მიერ მითითებულ ცოციას ტიპს ტექსტურ ველში.
e HID_PROP_ALIGN 14a განსაზღვრავს სწორების პარამეტრებს ტექსტისთვის ან გრაფიკული გამოსახულებებისთვის, რომლებიც გამოიყენება სამართავ ღილაკზე.
18 HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 75 აყენებს სამართავი ღილაკის ველის ფონის ფერს.
10 HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
17 HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
13 HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 51 The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 12e განსაზღვრავს ბიჯური რეგულატორის სამართავი ღილაკის თითოეული აქტივაციისას დამატების ან გამოკლების ინტერვალებს.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 122 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
10 HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
11 HID_PROP_EDITMASK 1b5 განსაზღვრავს რედაქტირების ნიღაბს. სიმბოლოს კოდის მითითებით, თქვენ შეგიძლიათ განსაზღვროთ თუ რა მონაცემების შეყვანა შეუძლია მომხმარებელს სამართავი ღილაკის ველში.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 53 Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
18 HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
11 HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
17 HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL f9 While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
16 HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
14 HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
17 HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
16 HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL c9 Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
13 HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 85 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents.
13 HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
1b HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
13 HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
15 HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
14 HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1e HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
13 HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
12 HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
17 HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
14 HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
14 HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
13 HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 54 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field.
10 HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
f HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
18 HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 59 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.
11 HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4b The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus.
d HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 61 In this dialog you can specify, among others,  the data source and the events for the whole form.
18 HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
16 HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 40 Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information.
12 HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
11 HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
18 HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
13 HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 72 The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source.
10 HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
e HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
13 HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
11 HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
18 HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
11 HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
10 HID_EVT_RELOADED 4a The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
17 HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
10 HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
11 HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
15 HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
15 HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 51 The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form.
14 HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6b If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
14 HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
18 HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
13 HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
15 HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fd Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
15 HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 80 If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform.
18 HID_PROP_FILTER_CRITERIA 8c Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause.
1a HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
12 HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
e HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
19 HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
16 HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
13 HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
18 HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
2c modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FautoB 6f Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document.
2c modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FdownB 5d Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order.
2a modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FupB 5c Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order.
2f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FCTRLtree 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 79 In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key.
d HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
f .uno%3AAddField 52 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
14 SID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 34 Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry.
11 SID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN a6 Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
a SID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
12 HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
d SID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
f SID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 84 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ftableselectionpage%2Ftable 1c Specifies the desired table.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ftableselectionpage%2Fdatasource 3a Specifies the data source that contains the desired table.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fcontentfieldpage%2Fselectfield 3f Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fcontenttablepage%2Ftable 76 In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field.
3e DBP_EDIT_RID_PAGE_LCW_CONTENTSELECTION_FIELD_ET_DISPLAYEDFIELD 4a Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes.
3e DBP_LISTBOX_RID_PAGE_LCW_CONTENTSELECTION_FIELD_LB_SELECTFIELD 3d Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldlinkpage%2Flisttable 5b Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldlinkpage%2Fvaluefield 5d Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FnoRadiobutton 7a Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form.
42 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FstoreInFieldCombobox 4b Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved.
3c modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FyesRadiobutton 6d Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 67 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1e .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRigh 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1e .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBotto 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 92 Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 90 Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 156 Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlight Color icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlight Color icon again. To change the highlight color, click the arrow next to the Highlight Color icon, and then click the color that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ab Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 71 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 5b Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 57 Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenURL 9f Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
1c HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 4a Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
18 HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 21 Closes the dialog without saving.
14 HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
17 HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 39 Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
18 HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 3e Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fframe c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fanonymous 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fpassword 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Flogin 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2Fclose 64 Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Flinktyp_ftp 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fframe c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2Fapply 3f Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Flinktyp_internet 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fframe c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fframe c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2FTreeListBox 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fsubject 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fadressbook 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fbrowse 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Ftarget 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Furl 45 Specifies the URL, which results from the entries in Path and Target.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Ffileopen 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2FHyperlinkDocPage a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Ftypes 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fcreate 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fpath 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Feditlater 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Feditnow 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
16 .uno%3ADSBAdministrate b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
10 .uno%3ADSBEditDB 2d Opens the selected database file for editing.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
19 .uno%3ADSBCloseConnection 68 Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
1f HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fautoformat 79 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableformat 7e Opens the Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fcolumnname 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastable 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftabledbcols 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftablecols 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallright 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fnumformat 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneright 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneleft 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableheading 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallleft 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Frowonly 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ffromdatabase 1d Accepts the database formats.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastext 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fop3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2FStandardFilterDialog 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
35 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2FQueryFilterDialog 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fop2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 3a Specifies the sort order (either ascending or descending).
29 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FpbSearchAgain 1d Starts or cancels the search.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbWildCard 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbStartOver 77 Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbBackwards 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbAllFields 1c Searches through all fields.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSingleField 28 Searches through a specified data field.
21 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2Fclose 5d Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbRegular 22 Searches with regular expressions.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForText 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForNull 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForNotNull 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbUseFormat 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbCase 53 Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FlbForm 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FlbPosition 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fadd 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fqueries 13 Shows only queries.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Ftables 12 Shows only tables.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fclose 1d Closes the Add Tables dialog.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Ftablelist 1b Lists the available tables.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 8b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 8b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
10 SID_MODIFYSTATUS 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fwidth 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fedges 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fposterdialog%2Fvalue 43 Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fheight 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 7e Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 71 This icon on the Image bar opens the Image Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 2a Removes noise by applying a median filter.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize c4 Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 86 Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2Fvalue 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fagingdialog%2Fvalue 84 Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2Finvert 24 Specifies to also invert all pixels.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 32 Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia a0 All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 55 Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 57 Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4f Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4b With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 52 Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 81 Opens the Fontwork dialog from which you can insert styled text not possible through standard font formatting into your document.
e .uno%3ADBLimit 4b Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 93 First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fnondistinct 21 Not use distinct values in query.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fdistinct 1d Use distinct values in query.
3d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2FQueryPropertiesDialog 1d Use distinct values in query.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 5a Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fsearch 2d Finds the next occurrence of the search term.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fbackwards 7a კურსორის მიმდებარე მდებარეობიდან უკან ძიება.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fwrap cc ეძებს სრულად დახმარების გევრდზე, იწყებს კურსორის მიმდინარე მდგომარეობიდან.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fmatchcase 78 განასხვავებს ტექსტის ზედა და ქვედა რეგისტრს.
10 HID_HELP_TOOLBOX e0 ხელსაწყოთა ზოლი შეიცავს მნიშვნელოვან ფუნქციებს რათა აკონტროლს დახმარების სისტემა
1a HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 89 გადატანა საწყისი გევრდი მიმიდნარე დახმარების თემა
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontrol%2Ftabcontrol 62 The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks.
1a HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 5e დამალე და აჩვენე ნავიგაციის პანელი
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fwholewords 4c იპოვე მხოლოდ სრული სიტყვები.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 27 Provides an overview of the Help system
1d HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 38 გადატანა წინა გვერდი
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontrol%2Factive f3 სიის ველი მდებარეობს ძალიან ზევით სადაც შეგიძლიათ სხვაც აირჩიოთ %PRODUCTNAME დახმარების მოდულები.
1c HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 51 წინას გადატანა შემდეგი გვერდი
1a HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 44 დაბეჭდე მიმდინარე გვერდი
1e HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 5d დაამატე გვერდი თქვენს სანიშნეებში
21 HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 59 გახსენი იპოვე ამ გვერდზე დიალოგი.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fsearchterm cb შეიტანეთ ტექსტი რომლის მოძებნაც გინდათ ან აირჩიეთ ტექსტის ჩანაწერი სიიდან .
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpindexpage%2Fdisplay 6e დააწკაპუნეთ რათა გამოჩნდეს არჩეული თემა.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpindexpage%2FHelpIndexPage da ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ შეტანაზე ან აკრიფეთ სიტყვა რომელიც გინდათ რომ იპოვოთ ინდექსში.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fdisplay 5b აჩვენებს სიაში მონიშნულ ჩანაწერს.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fcompletewords e6 განსაზღვრავს შეტანილი ზუსტი სიტყვების ძიებას. არასრული სიტყვები არ იქნებიან ნაპოვნი.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fresults 6a Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Ffind bd დააწკაპუნეთ რათა დაიწყოს სრული ტექსტის ძიება რომელიც თქვენ შეიყვანეთ.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fheadings b6 განსაზღვრავს რომ საძიებო სიტყვა ეძებოს მხოლოდ დოკუმენტის სათაურში.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fsearch bb შეიყვანეთ საძოებო სიტყვა აქ. ძიება არ არის მთავრულის გათვალისწინებით.
19 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 4d მონიშნული სანიშნეების წაშლა
19 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 92 დიალოგის გახსნა სანიშნისთვის სხვა სახელის შესაყვანად
17 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 63 არჩეული სათაურის დახმარების ჩვენება
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpbookmarkpage%2FHelpBookmarkPage 174 ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ სანიშნზე ან დააჭირეთ დაბრუნების კლავიშს რათა გაიხსნას დახმარების გვერდი.მარჯვენა დაწკაპუნება ხსნის კონტექსტურ მენიუს
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fbookmarkdialog%2FBookmarkDialog 10c სანიშნებში ჩამატებული სახელების ჩვენება. თქვენ ასევე შეგიძლიათ  სანიშნისთვის აკრიფოთ ახალი სახელი.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontentpage%2FHelpContentPage 56 Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle c7 მონიშნული ობიექტებისათვის სამგანზომილებიანი ეფექტის ჩარტვა და გამორთვა.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 84 მონიშნულ ობიექტს ატრიალებს ქვემოთ ხუთი გრადუსით.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 8a მონიშნულ ობიექტს ატრიალებს მარცხნივ ხუთი გრადუსით.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 65 ხსნის ექსრუზიის ფერის ხელსაწყოს ზოლს.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 64 ხსნის ექსტრუზიის განათებულ ფანჯარას.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 8a მონიშნულ ობიექტს ატრიალებს მარჯვნივ ხუთი გრადუსით.
38 svx%2Fui%2Fextrustiondepthdialog%2FExtrustionDepthDialog 48 ექსტრუზიის სიღრმის შეტანა.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 55 ხსნის ექსტრუზიის ღრმა ფანჯარას.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 64 ხსნის ექსტრუზიის ზედაპირულ ფანჯარას.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 6d ხსნის ექსტრუზიის მიმართულების ფანჯარას.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 81 მონიშნულ ობიექტს ატრიალებს ზემოთ ხუთი გრადუსით.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 3e მიმართულების მონიშვნა.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 63 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
14 HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 68 According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk.
12 HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
12 HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 93 Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 8f განსაზღვრავს, რომ თქვენ გინდათ შექმნათ პირადი წერილი.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE1 45 Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 81 Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area.
19 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6f Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer.
21 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6e Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address.
13 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
13 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
17 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
1d HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER a3 Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size.
18 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
1e HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 66 Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE2 57 Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper.
19 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
16 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4c Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template.
20 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Includes a small size return address on the letter template.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
15 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 55 უმატებს ლოგოს წერილის შაბლონზე.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE3 38 Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
21 HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 48 Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template.
1c HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Specifies the street address of the sender.
18 HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 21 Specifies the name of the sender.
1e HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 3e Address database fields are inserted into the letter template.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 33 Use the address data from the following text boxes.
1f HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 4d Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Specifies the sender and recipient information.
1f HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 6e ურთავს გვერდის ნომრებს წერილის შაბლონში.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 30 Select to suppress the footer on the first page.
14 HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 64 შეიყვანეთ ქვედა კოლონტიტულის ტექსტი.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE5 6d განსაზღვრავს ქვედა კოლონტიტულის ტექსტს.
19 HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 31 Saves the template and keeps it open for editing.
12 HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5c Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 73 განსაზღვრავს დოკუმენტის შაბლონის სათაურს.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE6 a5 განსაზღვრავს სად და რა სახელით შეინახოს დოკუმენტი და შაბლონი.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b0 According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 8a The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK c8 Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 71 შექმენი ფაქსის შაბლონი პირადი ფაქსისთვის.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 6b ქმნის შაბლონს ბიზნეს-სტილის ფაქსისთვის.
d HID_FAX_PAGE1 48 განსაზღვრავს ფაქსის სტილს.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 48 უმატებს ქვედა კოლონტიტულს.
16 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEDATE 48 უმატებს ქვედა კოლონტიტულს.
23 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSECOMMUNICATIONTYPE 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
d HID_FAX_PAGE2 73 განსაზღვრავს ფაქსის ამოსაბეჭდ ელემენტებს.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 3c უმატებს სათაურის ველს.
16 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSELOGO 42 უმატებს კომპანიის ლოგოს.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LSTCOMMUNICATIONTYPE 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 45 Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 76 Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document.
1d WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 1e Enter the sender address data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 1e Enter the sender address data.
d HID_FAX_PAGE3 99 განსაზღვრავს გამგზავნის და მიმღების ინფორმაციას ფაქსში.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 1e Enter the sender address data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 1e Enter the sender address data.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 1e Enter the sender address data.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1e Enter the sender address data.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 8a ბეჭდავს გვერდის ნომერს ქვედა კოლონტიტულის არეალში.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 44 Suppresses the footer on the first page of a multipage fax document.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 34 Specifies the text to be printed in the footer area.
d HID_FAX_PAGE4 79 განსაზღვრავს ქვედა კოლონტიტულის მონაცემებს.
1a WIZARDS_HID_OPTMAKECHANGES 50 Creates and saves the fax template, then opens the template for further editing.
18 WIZARDS_HID_OPTCREATEFAX 59 Creates and saves the fax template, then opens a new fax document based on that template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_CMDPATH 58 Click to enter or select the complete path, including the file name of the fax template.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 5b შეიყვანეთ ფაქსის შაბლონის სახელი.
d HID_FAX_PAGE5 7a განსაზღვრავს შაბლონის სახელს და მდებარეობას.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4d Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 29 Select the page design from the list box.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 79 განსაზღვრავს გვერდის დიზაინს განრიგისათვის.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 26 Specifies the location of the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 5b შეიყვანეთ ფაქსის შაბლონის სახელი.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 22 Specifies the time of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 22 Specifies the date of the meeting.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3d Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 28 Specifies whether to print a Notes line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 2f Specifies whether to print a Please bring line.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 2e Specifies whether to print a Please read line.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 34 Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 79 განსაზღვრავს გვერდის დიზაინს განრიგისათვის.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 4d Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facility personnel.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the moderator.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 48 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the minute keeper.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 46 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the chairperson.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 58 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 79 განსაზღვრავს გვერდის დიზაინს განრიგისათვის.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Moves the current topic row down.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 1f Moves the current topic row up.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 34 Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1e Removes the current topic row.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 79 განსაზღვრავს გვერდის დიზაინს განრიგისათვის.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 53 Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 5b შეიყვანეთ ფაქსის შაბლონის სახელი.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5f Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 36 Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 39 Click to create the form without answering further pages.
12 HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 28 Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 2d Displays the fields that are in the new form.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEFIELDDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVE_PK_SELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEFIELDUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 42 Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 3d Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 32 Select the relation on which the subform is based.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 35 Click to add a subform based on an existing relation.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 18 Select to add a subform.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 3d Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 44 Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED2 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE2 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED2 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED2 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 1d The labels are right-aligned.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 1c The labels are left-aligned.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 21 Select to disallow deleting data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 20 Select to disallow editing data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 23 Select to disallow adding new data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 4f Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 37 Creates a form that is only used for entering new data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 30 Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 29 Specifies that the fields have no border.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2b Specifies that the field borders look flat.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 5b შეიყვანეთ ფაქსის შაბლონის სახელი.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 3f Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 4a Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 5b შეიყვანეთ ფაქსის შაბლონის სახელი.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 1d Select the report properties.
1b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilot 2a Activates the wizard for creating reports.
1c HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1e HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 40 Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST b4 Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING c6 Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
1b HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
15 HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
15 HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 33 Select the first field by which to sort the report.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 33 Selects a portrait page orientation for the report.
19 HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 34 Selects a landscape page orientation for the report.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 8a Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 65 Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more.
1e HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 30 When you click Finish, the report will be saved.
1e HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 6f Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 44 When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 89 Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created.
15 HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 43 Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FnextPageButton 36 Saves the current settings and moves to the next page.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FlastPageButton 34 Returns to the selections made on the previous page.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdelDesingButton 31 Deletes the selected design from the design list.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdesignsTreeview 1e Displays all existing designs.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FoldDesignRadiobutton 81 Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FnewDesignRadiobutton 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FindexEntry 66 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FperlRadiobutton 3d Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FCGIEntry 48 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FASPRadiobutton 99 When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FchgAutoRadiobutton 8b The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FstandardRadiobutton 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FcontentCheckbutton 27 Creates a title page for your document.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FnotesCheckbutton 2d Specifies that your notes are also displayed.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FframesRadiobutton b2 Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FkioskRadiobutton 87 Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdurationSpinbutton 32 Defines the amount of time for each slide display.
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FchgDefaultRadiobutton d4 The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FendlessCheckbutton 55 Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FURLEntry 6f Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FwebCastRadiobutton 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fresolution3Radiobutton 3a Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FqualityCombobox b4 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FjpgRadiobutton 82 The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fresolution2Radiobutton 3d Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FgifRadiobutton 75 The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FsldSoundCheckbutton 60 Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fresolution1Radiobutton 5f Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FpngRadiobutton 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fpage3 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
39 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FmiscTextview 36 Specifies additional text to appear on the title page.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FwwwEntry 49 Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FemailEntry 1d Specifies the e-mail address.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FauthorEntry 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FtextOnlyCheckbutton 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FvLinkButton 58 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FlinkButton 55 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FbackButton 56 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FuserRadiobutton 43 Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdefaultRadiobutton 34 Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FaLinkButton 57 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FtextButton 50 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdocColorsRadiobutton 43 Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document.
15 HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
3a modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Ftoleft 31 Removes the selected option fields from the list.
40 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Fradiobuttons 46 Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Ftoright 4a Confirms the current label and copies the label to the Option fields list.
3f modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Fradiolabels 6d Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form.
48 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefaultselectionno 49 Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice.
47 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefselectionfield 53 Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form.
49 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefaultselectionyes 5b Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionvaluespage%2Fradiobuttons 49 Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionvaluespage%2Foptionvalue 4d Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FnoRadiobutton 5f Specifies that you want to save the reference values in the form only, and not in the database.
42 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FstoreInFieldCombobox 45 Select the data field in which the reference values have to be saved.
3c modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FyesRadiobutton 43 Specifies that you want to save the reference values in a database.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionsfinalpage%2Fnameit 66 Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 56 Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted.
17 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD a7 Microsoft Word ფორმატის *.doc დოკუმენტების OpenDocument *.odt დოკუმენტებად გარდაქმნა.
25 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
1e HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
1e HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
21 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT bc Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 4f Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6b Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 57 Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 3b Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 16 Starts the conversion.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 4b Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1a Closes the Euro Converter.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4b Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 22 Activates the help for the dialog.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 32 Specifies the currency to be converted into euros.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
15 HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 14 Go to previous step.
13 HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 32 Exits the wizard without implementing any changes.
13 HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 44 Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fgroupwise 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fmacosx 4c Select this option if you already use an address book in macOS Address book.
c slot%3A10934 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
11 HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 10 Go to next step.
2e modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fkde 4a Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
36 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fthunderbird 50 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird or Icedove.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Ffirefox 4e Select this option if you already use an address book in Firefox or Iceweasel.
30 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fother 60 Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename].
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2FSelectTypePage 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fevoldap 48 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fevolution 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2Fsettings 3a Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2FInvokeAdminPage 5e Allows you to enter additional settings for LDAP address data and other external data sources.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2Ftable 59 Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2FSelectTablePage 6f $[officename]-სთვის საზღვრავს საერთო პარამეტრებს.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Favailable db Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
2f modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Fname 1f Specifies the data source name.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Fbrowse 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2FDataSourcePage 81 Specifies a location for the address book file and a name under which the data source will be listed in the data source explorer.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2Fassign 34 Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2FFieldAssignPage 3f Opens a dialog that allows you to specify the field assignment.
11 HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 128 მოთხოვნაში ჩასამატებლად ორჯერ დააწკაპუნეთ ველებზე. გამოიყენეთ გადატრევა-დაგდებით კავშირების განსასაზღვრად.
1d HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 15 Edit Join Properties.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 130 უჯრედზე დაწკაპუნებით საშუალება გეძლევათ ამოირჩიოთ სორტირების პარამეტრი: აღმავალი, დაღმავალი და არასორტირებული.
12 HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 26 Select conditions to define the query.
22 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsavedialog%2Ftitle 74 შეიტანეთ მოთხოვნის ან ცხრილის ხედის სახელი
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsavedialog%2Fschema 49 Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 137 შეიტანეთ იმ მონაცემთა ველის სახელი, რომელიც მოთხოვნაში გამოიყენეთ. ქვედა ზოლის ყველა პარამეტრი ამ ველს მიეკუთვნება.
13 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT d2 განსაზღვრავსკრიტერიუმებსრომლითაც მონაცემთა ველის შიგთავსი უნდა გაიფლიტროს.
16 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 5a If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query
17 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 9a The Parameter Input dialog asks the user to enter the parameter values. Enter a value for each query parameter and confirm by clicking OK or typing Enter.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 1c2 განსაზღვრავს მეტსახელს, რომელიც მოთხოვნის ჩამონთვალში გამოიყენება ველის სახელის ნაცვლად. ეს მომხმარებლის მიერ განსაზღვრული სატაურბის გამოყენების საშუალებას იძლევა
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE ce მონიშნული მონაცემთა ველის შესაბამისი მონაცემთა ბაზის ცხრილი ჩამოთვლილია აქ
21 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjoindialog%2Ftype 105 სრული შეერთების შემთხვევაში ცხრილის შედეგები მოიცავს მარცხენა და მარჯვენა ცხრილების ყველა ველს.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjoindialog%2Ftable2 b4 აკონკრეტებს იმ ორ განსხვავებულ ცხრილს, რომელთა გაერთიანებაც გსურთ.
5 dummy 111 Moreზე, დაწკაპუნებისას გამოჩნდება დილოგური ფანჯარა დამატებითი ინფორმაციით მოცემული პრობლემის შესახებ.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirmpassword 1d Enter the new password again.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fnewpassword 17 Enter the new password.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Foldpassword 17 Enter the old password.
29 SFX2%3AEDIT%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_USER 6a აკონკრეტებს ახალი მომხმარებლის სახელს.
1c HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 51 აჩვენებს დამხარების ტექსტებს.
16 HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 158 აკონკრეტებს მონაცემთა ველის სახელს. გაითვალისწინეთ მონაცემთა ბაზის შეზღუდვები, როგორიცაა სახელის სიგრძე, სიმბოლოები და ჰარები.
19 HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 63 აკონკრეტებს არასავალდებულო აღწერას.
18 HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 99 ეს არე საშუალებას გაძლევთ განსაზღვროთ ცხრილის სტრუქტურა
1a SID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 14c თუ ცხრილი არ იყო შენახული, მიმდინარე რიგის ზემოთ სვამს ცარიელ რიგს. თუ ცხრილის იყო შენახული, ცარიელ რიგს სვამს ცხრუილის ბოლოს.
20 SID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY f5 თუ ამ ბრძანებას მონიშნული აქვს თოლია, მონაცემთა ველი ამ ხაზში წარმოადგენს ძირითად გასაღებს.
16 HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 3f აკონკრეტებს ველის ტიპს.
13 HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT d1 აკონკრეტებს მნიშვნელობას, რომელიც ნაგულისხმევია მონაცემთა ახალ ჩანაწერებში.
19 HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE ad აჩვენებს ფორმატის კოდს, რომლის მონიშვნაც შესაძლებელია ... ღილაკის
d .uno%3ADelete 3e შლის მონიშნულ სტრიქონს
12 HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 85 ეს ღილაკი ხსნის ველის ფორმატის დიალოგურ ფანჯარას.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FINDEX_LIST 85 Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialog.
14 HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 3f შლის მიმდინარე ინდექსს.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_DROP 3f შლის მიმდინარე ინდექსს.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 10e ინდექსის დიზაინისდიალოგური ფანჯარა საშუალებას გაძლევთ დაარედაქტიროთ ინდექსები მიმდინარე ცხრილში.
23 HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 53 განსაზღვრავს დალაგების წყობას
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_RENAME 76 მიმდინარე ინდექსისთვის სახელის გადარქმევა.
1f HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD f5 აჩვენებს მიმდინარე ცხრილში ჩამონათვალის ველებს. შესაძლებელია ერთზე მეტი ცხრილის მონიშვნა.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_SAVE 7c მიმდინარე ინდექსს.მონაცემთა წყაროში ინახავას
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2Fclose 45 ხურავს დიალოგურ ფანჯარას.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_RESET ff მიმდინარე ინდექსს აყენებს იმ პარამეტრებზე, რომელიც მას ჰქონდა დიალოგის დაწყების მომენტისთვის.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FUNIQUE bc აკონკრეტებს იყენებს თუ არა მიმდინარე ინდექსი უნიკალურ მნიშვნელობებს.
13 HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 130 აქ თქვენ შეგიძლიათ მიმდინარე მონაცემთა ბაზაში ერთმანეთთან დააკავშიროთ ველები ჩვეულებრივი მონაცემთა ველებიდან .
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdeldefault 60 If you delete the corresponding primary key, a set value will be set to all external key fields.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdelcascade 69 Specifies that all external key fields will be deleted if you delete the corresponding primary key field.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation c6 საშუალებას გაძლევთ განსაზღვროთ და დაარედაქტიროთ რელაცია ორ ცხრილს შორის.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Ftable2 cf კავშირისთვის მონიშნული ცხრილების სახელი აქ ჩნდება სვეტების სახელების სახით.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjoindialog%2Frelations 79 გასნაზღვრავს გასაღების ველებს რელაციისთვის.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Faddnull a1 If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set the "IS NULL" value to all external key fields. IS NULL means that the field is empty.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Faddaction 5a Specifies that any change made to a primary key does not affect other external key fields.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Faddcascade 77 Updates all the external key fields if the value of the corresponding primary key has been modified (Cascading Update).
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fadddefault 76 If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set a default value to all external key fields.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdelaction 63 Specifies that the deletion of a primary key will not have any effect on other external key fields.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdelnull 6d If you delete the corresponding primary key, the "IS NULL" value will be assigned to all external key fields.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fkeyname 46 Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fdata 1bb თუ მონაცემების თანდართვა შეუძლებელია, თქვენ დაინახავთ იმ ველების ჩამონათვალს სვეტების ინფორმაციის დიალოგურ ფანჯარაში, რომელთა მონაცემებსი კოპირებაც ვერ ხერხდება.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fdef 40 Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fdefdata 29 Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fprimarykey 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fview c0 If the database supports Views and you selected this option, a query will be created in the table container as a table. This option allows you to view the query results as a normal table view.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fname 54 განსაზღვრავს სახელს ასლისთვის.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fapplycolpage%2Fcolrh 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
21 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fapplycolpage%2Fto 3e Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fapplycolpage%2Ffrom bc Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftypeselectpage%2Fautobutton 23 Enables automatic type recognition.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftypeselectpage%2Fauto 40 Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition.
18 HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 90 შეიტანეთ ნაგულსმხევი მნიშვნელობა დიახ/არა ველისთვის.
11 HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 7a Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields.
f HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 83 შეიტანეთ სიმბოლოთა ოდენობა მონაცემთა ველისთვის.
10 HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 36 მონიშნეთ ველის ტიპი.
16 HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME e5 აჩვენებს მონიშნული მონაცემთა ველის სახელს. თუ გსურთ, შეგიძლიათ შეიტანოთ ახალი სახელი.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftypeselectpage%2Fcolumnnames 43 Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fdown_right 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fall 2b Selects all of the data fields in the list.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fup_right 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fright 180 ახდენს სამიზნე ცხრილის შესაძლო მონაცემთა ველების ჩამოთვლას. მხოლოდ საწყის ცხრილში მონიშნული მონაცემთა ველები იქნება ჩართული სამიზნე ცხრილში.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fnone 2a Clears all of the check boxes in the list.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fleft 38e ახდენს მონაცემთა ველების ჩამოთვლას საწყის ცხრილში. სამიზნე ცხრილში საწყისი ცხრილის მონაცემები ჩასართვლეად, დააწკაპუნეთ თოლიაზე მონაცემთა ველის სახელის წინ. საწყისი ცხრილის მონაცემთა ველის შიგტავსის ჩასახაზად სამიზნე ცხრიის სხვა მონაცემტა ველში, დააწკაპუნეთ მონაცემთა ველზე საწყისი ცხრილის ჩამონათვალში, შემდეგ კი ზედა ან ქვედა ისარზე.
16 HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b2 Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box clear.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fusesql92 89 Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneratedvaluespage%2Fquery 63 Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneratedvaluespage%2Fstatement 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneratedvaluespage%2Fautoretrieve 67 Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source.
18 HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET_ODBC 152 მონიშნეთ ის კოდის გარდამქმნელი, რომლის გამოყენებაც გსურთ მონაცემთა ბაზის სანახავად $[officename]-ში. ეს არ მოქმედებს მონაცემთა ბაზაზე.
22 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fodbcpage%2Foptions 136 გამოიყენეთ ეს ტექსტური ველი საჭიროების შემთხვევაში დრაივერის დამატებითი არასავალდებულო პარამატერების შესატანად
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbasepage%2FindiciesButton 61 Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbasepage%2FshowDelRowsCheckbutton 7f Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Fremove 3a Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Faddall 38 Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Fadd 33 Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Ftableindex 3a Lists the current indexes for the selected database table.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Ffreeindex 3b Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Ftable 31 Select the database table that you want to index.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Fremoveall 38 Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2FDBaseIndexDialog 29 Lets you organize dBASE database indexes.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fexecute 40 Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fstatus 48 Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsqlhistory 6a Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsql 3a Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2FDirectSQLDialog 4f Opens a dialog where you can enter an SQL command for administering a database.
1e HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 5b Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL ed Some databases track changes to each record by assigning version number to fields that are changed. This number is incremented by 1 each time the field is changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
35 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseodbcliterals 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Finputchecks d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
34 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fignorecurrency a9 Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseas 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseoj 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Feol 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fappend 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fignoreprivs 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseschemaname 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
34 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fusecatalogname b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fprimarykeys 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Freplaceparams 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fdisplayver 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fcreateindex 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 38 Select the type of database that you want to connect to.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FpassCheckbutton 61 If checked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FconnectionButton 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FPageGeneral 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FdatasourceType 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FconnectDatabase 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FopenDatabase a6 Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
38 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FopenExistingDatabase 62 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FdocListBox 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneralpagewizard%2FcreateDatabase 20 Select to create a new database.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fusewizard 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fnoregister 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fyesregister 11d Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Field - More Fields) or in a mail merge.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fopenediting 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2FPageFinal 6a Specifies whether you want to register the database, open the database for editing, or insert a new table.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 2a Click to open a database selection dialog.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 1d Open a path selection dialog.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjdbcconnectionpage%2FjdbcButton 2f Tests the connection with the current settings.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FjavaDriverLabel 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjdbcconnectionpage%2Fbrowseurl df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjdbcconnectionpage%2FjdbcEntry 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
37 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjdbcconnectionpage%2FJDBCConnectionPage 30 Specifies the options to access a JDBC database.
17 HID_DSADMIN_USESSL_LDAP 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
1b HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
17 HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
19 HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizmysqlintropage%2Fjdbc 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizmysqlintropage%2Fodbc 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 33 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog:
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FjavaDriverLabel 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizspreadsheetpage%2Fbrowse 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizspreadsheetpage%2Fbrowseurl 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
37 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizspreadsheetpage%2Fpasswordrequired 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
3b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizspreadsheetpage%2FDBWizSpreadsheetPage 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwiztextpage%2Fbrowseurl fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwiztextpage%2Fbrowse 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Ftextfile 1a Click to access txt files.
22 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Fcsvfile 1a Click to access csv files.
21 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Fcustom 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Fextension 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Ffieldseparator 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Fthousandsseparator 87 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000).
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Ftextseparator 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwiztextpage%2FDBWizTextPage 3f Specifies the settings for importing a database in text format.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftextpage%2Fdecimalseparator 81 Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
3b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fauthentificationpage%2FtestConnectionButton 46 Check if the configured connection can be used to access the database.
3e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fauthentificationpage%2FpassRequiredCheckbutton 3e Select to prompt a user for a password to access the database.
3b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fauthentificationpage%2FgeneralUserNameEntry 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 25 Opens the Advanced Properties dialog.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 21 Opens the Connection Type Wizard.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
18 HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 25 Opens the Database Properties dialog.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail fe Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2Fok 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
34 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FfileNameEntry 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FupButton 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
36 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FnewFolderButton 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
35 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FCollectionView 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 44 Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 48 Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 38 Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesfilterpage%2FTablesFilterPage 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 4b Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 10 Opens a submenu.
d .uno%3ADBSort 10 Opens a submenu.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsummarypage%2Ftextview 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fbackuppage%2Fbrowse c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fbackuppage%2FBackupPage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsummarypage%2FSummaryPage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fmigratepage%2FMigratePage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fprepagepage%2FPreparePage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 99 Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 9f აკრიფეთ მომხმარებლის სახელი მონაცემთა ბაზაში შესასვლელად.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Fdate 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
39 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2FDateTimeDialog 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Ftime 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
36 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Falignment 9 Alignment
37 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fbottompage 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
35 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagenofm b Page N of M
32 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagen 6 Page N
34 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Ftoppage 14 Top of Page (Header)
3d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2FPageNumberDialog 5d You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 67 To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select All - Select Report.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fdelete 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
2d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fkeep 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
2e modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fgroup 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2FFloatingSort b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
2d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fdown 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
2b modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fup 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
30 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fsorting 19 Select the sorting order.
31 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Finterval 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
2c modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fbox 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fheader 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Ffooter 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 14 Select a field type.
16 HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME e5 აჩვენებს მონიშნული მონაცემთა ველის სახელს. თუ გსურთ, შეგიძლიათ შეიტანოთ ახალი სახელი.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 2f Specifies the default value for a Yes/No field.
f HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 83 შეიტანეთ სიმბოლოთა ოდენობა მონაცემთა ველისთვის.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 7e Specifies the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4d Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 54 Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs)
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 43 Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 48 შლის შერჩეულ მომხმარებელს.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
38 svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkspacingdialog%2FFontworkSpacingDialog 7f შეიყვანეთ Fontwork სიმბოლოთა დაშორების მნიშვნელობა.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 71 აღებს Fontwork-ის სიმბოლოთა დაშორების ფანჯარას.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 53 აღებს Fontwork -ის სწორების ფანჯარას.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 6b Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects.
18 .uno%3AFontworkShapeType 64 Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects.
30 fps%2Fui%2Fremotefilesdialog%2FRemoteFilesDialog 1f Remote Files Service User Guide
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepother 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepallothers 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepmine 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2FConflictsDialog 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2Fshare dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2FShareDocumentDialog 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepallmine 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 64 If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 65 If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2FNewToolbarDialog 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
19 SID_FM_FILTER_IS_NOT_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
14 HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 195 The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions.
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 69 To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar.
2f svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkgallerydialog%2FctlFavorites bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
38 svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkgallerydialog%2FFontworkGalleryDialog bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 96 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Image Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
1c .uno%3APreviousTrackedChange 41 Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any.
18 .uno%3ANextTrackedChange 3d Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fextensions 94 The Extensions button opens the https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ page, where you can download templates and additional features for %PRODUCTNAME.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fmath_all 44 The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fdatabase_all 44 The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fimpress_all 44 The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fcalc_all 44 The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 48 Click a button on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fhelp 48 Click a button on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_remote 5e The Remote Files button presents a Remote files dialog to open files stored on remote servers.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2FStartCenter 48 Click a button on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Flocal_view 51 The Recent Files button shows thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_all 31 The Open File button presents a file open dialog.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_recent 51 The Recent Files button shows thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fdraw_all 44 The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fall_recent 51 The Recent Files button shows thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Ftemplates_all 66 Click the Templates dropdown button to display all existing templates on the right side of the window.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fwriter_all 44 The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fimport_btn 99 Press the Import button at the bottom right, and then choose a Category to import a template from your computer to that category in the Template Manager.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fexport_btn 8e Choose a template in the main window and then press the Export button at the bottom right to export the template to a folder on your computer.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fmove_btn bb Choose the Move option at the bottom right after selecting a template to move it to a different category. Default templates cannot be moved, but copies can be created in other categories.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fonline_link b5 To browse for more templates online, click on the Browse online templates icon at bottom left to open a browser window and search for templates at https://templates.libreoffice.org.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Faction_menu 48 Click on the Settings icon at the bottom left to open the Settings menu.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Ffilter_folder 36 Categories are folders where you place your templates.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Ffilter_application b8 You may filter for All Applications, Documents, Spreadsheets or Drawings by choosing an option from the dropdown box at the top-center. The main window displays the filtered templates.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fsearch_filter 7b You may search for a template by entering text in the search box at the top left. The Main window show the templates found.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2FTemplateDialog 70 The Template Manager dialog makes it easy to manage templates and allows to start new documents using templates.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense d3 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into LibreOffice) or LibreOffice since 2010-09-28.
f .uno%3ASafeMode b0 Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance.
c .uno%3AAbout e8 აჩვენებს ზოგადი პროგრამის ინფორმაციას როგორიცაა ვერსიის ნომერი და საავტორო უფლებები.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 4f Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate ee Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite.
16 .uno%3AQuestionAnswers 34 Opens the community support page in the web browser.
14 .uno%3ADocumentation 8f Opens the documentation page in the web browser, where users can download, read or purchase %PRODUCTNAME user guides, written by the community.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex a5 აღებს $[officename]-ის დახმარების მთავარ გვერდს მიმდინარე პროგრამაში.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu f0 დახმარების მენიუ საშუალებას გაძლევთ დაიწყოთ და გააკონტროლოთ $[officename]-ის დახმარების სისტემა.
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp fc იძლევა გაფართოებული დახმარების მინიშნებების საშუალებას მაუსის ისრით შემდეგ დაწკაპუნებამდე.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX a6 The სტანდარტული ზოლი ხელმისაწვდომია ნებისმიერ $[officename] პეოგრამაში
12 .uno%3ATableDesign 43 Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to format the table.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX 119 The Table ზოლი შეიცავს ცხრილებთან მუშაობისთვის საჭირო ფუნქციებს. ის ჩნდება როდესაც კურსორს დააყენებთ ცხრილზე.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 34 Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns e7 ჩასვავს კურსორის პოზიციისათვის მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში მონიშნული ჩანაწერის ყველა ველს.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 9d შლის ჩანაწერს. მოთხოვნა წაშლამდე საჭიროებს დადასწტურებას.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 36 ქმნის ახალ ჩანაწერს.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 20 Allows you to undo a data entry.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 51 გადაგიყვანთ შემდეგ ჩანაწერზე.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 51 გადაგიყვანს პირველ ჩანაწერზე.
e .uno%3ARecSave da იმახსოვრებს ახალ მონაცემთა ჩანაწერს.ცვლილება რეგისტრირებულია მონაცემთა ბაზაში.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 4b გადაგიყვანთ ბოლო ჩანაწერზე.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 4b გადაგიყვანთ წინა ჩანაწერზე.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord ee აჩვენებს მიმდინარე ჩანაწერის ნომერს. შეიყვანეთ ციფრი შესაბამის ჩანაწერთან მისასვლელად.
e .uno%3AGridUse 114 აკონკრეტებს იმას რომ თქვენ შეგიძლიათ ამოძრაოთ ობიექტები მხოლოდ საკოორდინაციო ბადის წერტილების შორის.
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 3c Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX 13a The წერტილების შეცვლა ზოლი გამოჩნდება როდისაც თქვენ მონიშნავთ პოლიგონის ობიექტებს და დააწკაპუნებთ წერტილების შეცვლა.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 40 ხაზის ან მრუდის დახურვა.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove ac ააქტიურებს რეჟიმს რომელშიც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ ამოძრაოთ წერტილები.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert c4 ააქტიურებს ჩასმის რეჟიმს. ეს რეჯიმი საშუალებას გაძლევთ ჩასვათ წერტილები.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric be ეს ხატულა გარდაქმნის კუთხის წერტილს ან გლუვ წეტილს სიმეტრიულ წერტილად.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete 1e7 გამოიყენეთ წაშლის წერტილის ხატულა ერთი ან რამდენიმე მონიშნული წერტილის წასაშლელად. თუ გსურთ რამოდენიმე წერტილის მონიშვნა დააწკაპუნეთ შესაბამის წერტილებზე კლავიში შიფტის დაჭერით.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth a4 გარდაქმნის კუთხის წერტილს ან გლუვ წეტილს სიმეტრიულ წერტილად.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 124 The Split Curve ხატულა ყოფს მრუდს. მონიშნეთ წერტილი ან წერტილები სადაც გსურთ მრუდის გაყოფა, შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ ხატულას
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 80 გარდაქმნის მრუდს სწორ ხაზად ან სწორ ხაზს მრუდად.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge a3 გარდაქმნის მონიშნულ წერტილს ან წერტილებს კუთხის წერტილებად.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 4e Inserts a chart based on data from a cell or table range or with default data.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 80 This submenu contains form controls like a textbox, checkbox, option button, and listbox that can be inserted into the document.
15 .uno%3AShapesLineMenu 49 This submenu contains straight, freeform, curved and polygon line shapes.
11 .uno%3AShapesMenu ae This submenu contains common shapes like a line, circle, triangle, and square, or a symbol shape like a smiley face, heart, and flower that can be inserted into the document.
16 HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 63 აირჩიეთ დასარედაქტირებელი ჩანაწერი.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog af ეს ბრძანება ხსნის დიალოგს პროგრამის მორგებული პარამეტრებისთვის.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Femail 19 Type your e-mail address.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ficity 1d Type the city where you live.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcompany 6f ამ ველში თქვენი კომპანიის სახელი ჩაწერეთ.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2FOptUserPage 2d Use this tab page to enter or edit user data.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdoctype ed საზღვრავს დოკუმენტის ტიპს რომლისთვისაც გსურთ ნაგულისხმევი ფაილთა ფორმატის განსაზღვრა.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Falienwarndialog%2Fask c2 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage 177 ზოგად სექციაში, ძშეგიძლიათ აირჩიოთ დოკუმენტთა შენახვისთვის ნაგულისხმევი პარამეტრები და შეგიძლიათ აირჩიოთ ფაილთა ნაგულისხმევი ფორმატები.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_settings 47 Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_docprinter 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_fsys d2 მონიშნეთ ეს უჯრა ფაილურ სისტემაში მისამართებისშეფარდებითი პარამეტრებისთვის
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdocinfo 108 საზღვრავს რომ თვისებების დიალოგი გამოჩნდება ყოველ ჯერზე როდესაც ირჩევთ შენახვა როგორც ბრძანებას.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fsaveas 1b8 საზღვრავს მარცხნივ არჩეული დოკუმენტის ტიპი ყოველთვის შეინახება ამ ფორმატში. მიმდინარე დოკუმენტისთვის ფაილის სხვა ტიპის არჩევა შეგიძლიათ შენახვა როგორც დიალოგით.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fwarnalienformat c2 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fbackup 1fd ინახავს დოკუმენტის წინა ვერსიას სარეზერვო ასლად როდესაც ინახავთ დოკუმენტს. ყოველთვის, როდესაც %PRODUCTNAME ქმნის სარეზერვო ასლს, წინა სარეზერვო ასლი ჩაენაცვლება. სარეზერვო ასლს აქვს .BAK გაფართოვება.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave 154 საზღვრავს რომ %PRODUCTNAME ინახავს ინფორმაციას რაც საჭიროა ავარიული დახურვის შემდეგ აღდგენისთვის. მიუთითეთ შენახვის დროის ინტერვალი.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave_spin af საზღვრავს დროის ინტერვალს წუთებში ავტო აღდგენის პარამეტრისთვის.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fuserautosave 8d Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves all open documents when saving auto recovery information. Uses the same time interval as AutoRecovery does.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fodfversion fc Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fedit 36 Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fdefault ef ნაგულისხმევი ღილაკი ანულებს წინასწარგანსაზღვრულ გეზებს ყველა მონიშნული ჩანაწერისთვის.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fpaths 65 To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2FOptPathsPage 75 This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fadd 60 Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fpaths 5f Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 96 მარლთწერის ბეჭდვისას შემოწმება და შეცდომების ხაზგასმა.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsdelete 59 Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptions 80 საზღვრავს მარლთწერის და გადატანის პარამეტრებს.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fdelete 3b Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fword 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoptions%2FBreakNumberOption 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2FOptLinguPage 94 მარლთწერის თვისებებს საზღვრავს, თესაუროსი და დეფიზები.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fnameedit 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Freplace 279 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary or a language-dependent custom dictionary. In exception dictionaries, the field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. In language-dependent custom dictionaries, the field contains a known root word, as a model of affixation of the new word or its usage in compound words. For example, in a German custom dictionary, the new word “Litschi” (lychee) with the model word “Gummi” (gum) will result recognition of “Litschis” (lychees), “Litschibaum” (lychee tree), “Litschifrucht” (lychee fruit) etc.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodules 58 შეიცავს დაყენებულ ენის მოდულებს.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsedit 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodulesedit 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsnew 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fexcept 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
2c cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fnewreplace a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Flanguage 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptionsedit 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fbook 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Flang 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fback 37 Click here to undo the current changes in the list box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fup 4b Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fdown 4b Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
27 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Flanguage 3f საზღვრავს მოდულის ენას.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Flingudicts 71 Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fpaletteselector 52 Specifies the name of a selected palette. You can select a different palette here.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fhex_custom 3d The color code of the color expressed as a hexadecimal value.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fcolorset 57 Contains a list of available colors. Click on the desired one in the list to select it.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fadd 29 Adds the new color to the Custom palette.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Frecentcolorset 35 Displays the last twelve colors selected and applied.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fdelete 30 Deletes the selected color without confirmation.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fnewpreview 71 Displays a preview of the color selected from the color palette and the changes you make with the controls below.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FColorPage 60 Allows you to select a color from a color palette, edit an existing color, or define new colors.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FG_custom 5a The color code of the green component of the color. Possible values are between 0 and 255.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FR_custom 58 The color code of the red component of the color. Possible values are between 0 and 255.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FB_custom 59 The color code of the blue component of the color. Possible values are between 0 and 255.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FyellowSpinbutton 40 Set the Yellow color value as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FmagSpinbutton 41 Set the Magenta color value as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FbrightSpinbutton 5f Set the Brightness directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100).
30 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FbrightRadiobutton c4 Sets the Brightness component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Saturation components in the two dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent ( 0 to 100).
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FsatSpinbutton 5f Set the Saturation directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100).
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FcyanSpinbutton 3e Set the Cyan color value as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FsatRadiobutton c4 Sets the Saturation component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Brightness components in the two dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent ( 0 to 100).
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FhueRadiobutton c6 Sets the Hue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Saturation and Brightness components in the two dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FhexEntry 5b Displays and sets the color value in the RGB color model expressed as a hexadecimal number.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FblueSpinbutton 3f Set the Blue color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FColorPicker 83 %PRODUCTNAME lets you define custom colors using a two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart of the Pick a Color dialog.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FredSpinbutton 3e Set the Red color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FgreenRadiobutton a9 Sets the Green component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Red and Blue components in the two dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FcolorField 11d Click in the big color area on the left to select a new color. Using this selector area you can modify two components of the color as represented in the RGB or HSB color models. Note that these are the two components not selected with the radio buttons on the right side of the dialog.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2Fprevious 61 In the right part of the bottom bar, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FkeySpinbutton 4e Set the Black color value or key (black) as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FhueSpinbutton 5b Set the Hue directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2Fpreview 5e In the left part of the bottom bar, the current result of your work in this dialog is visible.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FredRadiobutton a9 Sets the Red component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Blue components in the two dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FcolorSlider 61 With the vertical color component slider you can modify the value of each component of the color.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FgreenSpinbutton 40 Set the Green color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FblueRadiobutton a9 Sets the Blue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Red components in the two dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fyear 4a Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fcollectusageinfo 4f Send usage data to help The Document Foundation improve the software usability.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fdocstatus 48 Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ffiledlg 84 Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fexthelp 10d ასახავს დახმკარების ტექსტს, როდესაც კურსორს ხატულაზე აჩერებთ, მენიუს ბრძანება ან დიალოგზე კონტროლი.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 6f $[officename]-სთვის საზღვრავს საერთო პარამეტრებს.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont2 31 Enter or select the name of the replacement font.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont1 3e Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontname 3e Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fdelete 5b შლის არჩეული შრიფტის ჩანაცვლებას.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fchecklb f0 Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fnonpropfontonly 43 Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fusetable 36 Enables the font replacement settings that you define.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontheight 41 Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Freplacements e6 Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fshowfontpreview 7b Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmenuicons a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fforceopengl 44 Forces the use of OpenGL even if the graphics device is blacklisted.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseopengl 97 Use the high performance Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) to render all visual elements of the application, including windows, menus, toolbars and icons.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Ficonsize 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fsidebariconsize 2c Specifies the display size of sidebar icons.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fnotebookbariconsize 31 Specifies the display size of notebook bar icons.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmousepos 52 Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Ficonstyle 3b Specifies the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Faafont 2f Select to smooth the screen appearance of text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmousemiddle 30 Defines the function of the middle mouse button.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseaccel 63 Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Faanf 8f ანტიდაგლუვებისთვის შრიფტის უმცირესი ზომა შეიყვანეთ.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseaa af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
5 20201 4a Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ftrans 69 Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpaperorient 5e Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpapersize 58 Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fframe2 35 Defines which warnings appear before printing begins.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradcolor 49 Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstripes 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapdpi 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fconverttogray 38 Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2FOptPrintPage 24 Specifies the print setting options.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fprinter 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransnone 2f With this option transparency is never printed.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstep 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmaptrans 75 If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ffile 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegrad 44 If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmap 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapnormal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetrans a5 If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapresol 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransauto 76 Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page.
2d sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapoptimal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorconfig 32 Select the colors for the user interface elements.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fdelete 57 Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fsave 47 Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorschemelb 29 Selects the color scheme you want to use.
23 HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 22 Enter a name for the color scheme.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2FOptAppearancePage 35 Sets the colors for the $[officename] user interface.
38 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fsystempagepreviewcolor 4c Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautofontcolor 6c Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedtext 48 Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedgraphics 40 Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautodetecthc 5c Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftextselinreadonly 27 Displays cursor in read-only documents.
36 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2FOptAccessibilityPage 83 Sets options that make %PRODUCTNAME programs more accessible for users with reduced sight, limited dexterity or other disabilities.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage 73 საზღვრავს ჩატვირთვა/შენახვის პარამეტრებს.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fnoproxy 62 Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftp 2a Type the name of the proxy server for FTP.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttps 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftpport 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttp 2b Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fproxymode 3f საზღვრავს პროქსის ტიპს.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptemailpage%2Fbrowse 31 Opens a file dialog to select the e-mail program.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptemailpage%2Furl 27 Enter the e-mail program path and name.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Ftsas 2e Opens the Time Stamping Authority URLs dialog.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fcert 22 Opens the Certificate Path dialog.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2FOptSecurityPage 76 Defines the security options for saving documents, for web connections, and for opening documents that contain macros.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fsavepassword bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmasterpassword 27 Opens the Enter Master Password dialog.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Foptions 31 Opens the "Security Options and Warnings" dialog.
9 809226770 52 მონიშნულ ჩანაწერს სიიდან შლის.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fchange 51 Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 20 Enter the master password again.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmacro 20 Opens the Macro Security dialog.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 1a Enter the master password.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2FMasterPasswordDialog 26 Enter the master password to continue.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fconnections 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fremovepersonal e3 Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset Properties button on File - Properties - General.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fblockuntrusted 88 Blocks the use of links pointing to images not in the trusted locations defined on the Trusted Sources tab of the Macro Security dialog.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenpdf 93 Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhensigning cb Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenprinting 6b Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fsavesenddocs 7d Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fctrlclick 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fpassword 8e Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2FSecurityOptionsDialog 50 Set security related options and warnings about hidden information in documents.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsavegrflocal dd Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fprintextension a2 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasicwarning 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fcharset 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
22 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasic 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fignorefontnames 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Funknowntag 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fnumbersenglishus d6 If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2FOptHtmlPage 20 Defines settings for HTML pages.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a4 These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fcomments dc Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhrulercombobox 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ffieldcodes 4f Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulerright 30 Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulercombobox 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fgraphics 3e Specifies whether to display images and objects on the screen.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fmeasureunit 26 Specifies the Unit for HTML documents.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhelplines ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fsmoothscroll 2d Activates the smooth page scrolling function.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ftables 2f Displays the tables contained in your document.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 8c To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2FViewOptionsPage 81 Defines the default settings for displaying objects in your text documents and also the default settings for the window elements.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fdrawings 3e Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelbox 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardbox 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Findexheight 1f Specifies the size of the font.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2FOptFontTabPage 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistbox 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fidxbox 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardheight 1f Specifies the size of the font.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitleheight 1f Specifies the size of the font.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistheight 1f Specifies the size of the font.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelheight 1f Specifies the size of the font.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitlebox 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ftextplaceholder 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fendpage 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 190 If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbrochure 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbackground 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fhiddentext 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fblankpages 190 If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2FPrintOptionsPage 95 ტექსტში ან HTML დოკუმენტში საზღვრავს ბეჭდვის პარამეტრებს.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fpapertray a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fleftpages 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frtl 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Finblack 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frightpages 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fnone 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fformcontrols 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fgraphics 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fonly 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ffax 84 If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fend 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolinsert 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowinsert 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2FOptTablePage 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumfmtformatting 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frepeatheader 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffix 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowmove 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolmove 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fdontsplit 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fborder 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fvar 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumformatting 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffixprop 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fheader 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumalignment 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffilltab 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillindent 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillmargin 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursoronoff 1c Activates the direct cursor.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2FOptFormatAidsPage 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ftabs 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddenparafield 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillspace 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhyphens 185 Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with soft hyphens are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a soft hyphen has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fbreak 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fnonbreak af Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fparagraph 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fspaces 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentext 5f Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Formatting Marks is enabled.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursorinprot 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentextfield 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkcolor 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkpos 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchangedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeleted ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchanged 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsert 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2FOptRedLinePage 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fsquaremode 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fusecharunit 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftab 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fmetric 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatecharts be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatefields c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fnever 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fonrequest 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Falways 9c Always updates links while loading a document, and only if the document is in a trusted file location or the global security level is Low (Not recommended).
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2Fdefault 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2FOptCompatPage 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fapplyborder 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Flevel 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcharstyle 4b სიმბოლოს სტილის განსაზღვრა.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fchapseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcategory 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fposition 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fobjects 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumbering 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2FOptCaptionPage 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
14 SID_SW_ONLINEOPTIONS 46 Defines the basic settings for $[officename] documents in HTML format.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2FOptGridPage cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fusegridsnap 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fgridvisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisionx c1 უკანასკნელი ჩანაწერის რაოდენობის შეყვანა ფოსტის შერწყმაში ჩასართავად.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisiony c1 უკანასკნელი ჩანაწერის რაოდენობის შეყვანა ფოსტის შერწყმაში ჩასართავად.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawx 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawy 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsynchronize 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Ftblreg 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frowcolheader 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdraw 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvscroll 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fhscroll 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fobjgrf 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frangefind bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2FTpViewPage 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fsynczoom 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fcolor 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fanchor 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fbreak 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fgrid db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvalue 111 Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Foutline 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fclipmark f3 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fformula 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fguideline 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fnil 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdiagram 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fannot d1 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Freplwarncb 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftextfmtcb 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fformatcb 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fexprefcb f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Feditmodecb 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falignlb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftabmf 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fmarkhdrcb 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Funitlb 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fcopy 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fcopyfrom 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fentries 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Flists 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fadd 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fnew 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2FOptSortLists 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2Frows 50 Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2Fcolumns 56 Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2FColOrRowDialog 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fprec ae Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fgeneralprec dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformulaliteral 66 Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformulawildcards 5e Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Flookup cc Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2FOptCalculatePage 32 Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fminchange ad Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fiterate b1 Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformularegex 84 Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatestd 41 12/30/1899 არის ათვლის წერტილი.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fsteps 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdate1904 63 Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcase 64 Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcalc 11b Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatesc10 62 Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fmatch 14e Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When both, the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box and the Enable wildcards in formulas box are marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fentries 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Finsertions 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fdeletions 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fchanges 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2FOptChangesPage 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FprintCB e3 Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FsuppressCB 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FoptCalcPrintPage 31 Determines the printer settings for spreadsheets.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcompatibilitypage%2FOptCompatibilityPage 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptformula%2FOptFormula 49 Defines formula syntax options and loading options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdefaultpage%2FOptDefaultPage 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fmoveoutline 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fhandlesbezier ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fruler 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fdragstripes 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2FSdViewPage 26 Specifies the available display modes.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldbezangle 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
21 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fbigortho 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
1e svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fortho 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldsnaparea cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnappoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapframe 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapborder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
26 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnaphelplines 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldangle 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
13 HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP be საზღვრავს ბადის პარამეტრებს ობიექტების შექმნისთვის და გადატანისთვის.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpapertryfrmprntrcb 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbackcb 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffrontcb 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbrouchrb 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftilepgrb a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdefaultrb 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fblackwhiterb 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdatecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fprntopts 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftimecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagenmcb 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fhiddenpgcb 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffittopgrb 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fgrayscalerb 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagedefaultrb 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FcbCompatibility 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fenremotcont 54 Specifies that you want to enable Bluetooth remote control while Impress is running.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FscaleBox 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FOptSavePage 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fstartwithwizard 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fbackgroundback 4e Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master slide.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fcopywhenmove 56 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FmetricFields 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fqickedit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fdistrotcb 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fobjalwymov a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Funits 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fnorightspaces 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fzoom 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizescaled 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizenormal 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftext 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fframe 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftitle 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2FSmathSettings 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fdefault 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fcolors 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_saveorig bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_saveorig bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2FOptFltrPage 81 Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fchecklbcontainer ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasiansupport 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fuserinterface c3 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Flocalesetting 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrencylb 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fctlsupport 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fwesternlanguage 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdatepatterns cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrentdoc 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2FOptLanguagesPage 4b Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdecimalseparator 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasianlanguage 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fignorelanguagechange dd Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcomplexlanguage 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstart 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctkanacompression 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Flanguage 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctcompression 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fnocompression 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fend 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstandard 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharpunctkerning 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharkerning 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignoremiddledot 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchprolongedsoundmark 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementvisual 9d Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementlogical b2 Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fnumerals ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Frestricted 4b Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fsequencechecking 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2FOptCTLPage 3c Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Ftimeout 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fenablepooling 73 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fconnectionpooling 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fedit 3a Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fdelete 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fnew 35 Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2Fname e9 მონაცემთა ბაზის სახელი შეიყვანეთ. %PRODUCTNAME იყენებს სახელს მონაცემთა ბაზასთან წვდომისთვის.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2Fbrowse 3b Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2FDatabaseLinkDialog 34 Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fextendedtypes_enable 2c Allow UNO object types as valid Basic types.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_proc 37 Automatically insert closing statements for procedures.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_quotes 20 Automatically close open quotes.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_paren 25 Automatically close open parenthesis.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautocorrect 3b Correct cases of Basic variables and keywords while typing.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fcodecomplete_enable 22 Display methods of a Basic object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexpertconfig 5e Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexperimental 1c Enable experimental features
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fclasspath 1c Opens the Class Path dialog.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fmacrorecording 16 Enable macro recording
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fparameters 27 Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fadd 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavas b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavaenabled 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
24 cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Freset 28 Undo changes done so far in this dialog.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Fedit 26 Opens a dialog to edit the preference.
2a cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Fpreferences 3f List the preferences organized hierarchically in a tree layout.
2a cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2FsearchEntry 38 Type the preference you want to display in the text area
2b cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2FsearchButton 3d Click to search your preference text in the Preferences tree.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexpertconfig 5e Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Fremove 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Ffolder 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Farchive 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
30 SVX_EDIT_RID_SVXPAGE_INET_SCRIPTING_ED_CLASSPATH 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fremovebtn 63 JRE-ს გაშვების მონიშნულ პარამეტრს შლის.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Feditbtn 44 Opens a dialog where the selected JRE start parameter can be edited.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fassignbtn 82 JRE-ს მიმდინარე გაშვების პარამეტრებს სიას ამატებს.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fassignlist 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fparameterfield 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Flow c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fmed e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
26 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fhigh bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fvhigh 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2FSecurityLevelPage 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovefile 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
29 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Faddfile 5e Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
2b xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Flocations 5f Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovecert 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fviewcert 3f Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fcertificates 54 ჩამოთვლის სანდო სერტიფიკატებს.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2FSecurityTrustPage 54 ჩამოთვლის სანდო სერტიფიკატებს.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Ftest 44 Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fport 2e SMTP პორტის შეყვანა.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplyto 6d შეიყვანეთ ელფოსტაზე საპასუხო მისამართი.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserver 4d SMTP სერვერის სახელი შეიყვანეთ.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplytocb 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Faddress 6d შეიყვანეთ ელფოსტაზე საპასუხო მისამართი.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fdisplayname 42 შეიყვანეთ თქვენი სახელი.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserverauthentication 72 Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fsecure a3 როცა შესაძლებელია იყენებს ფოსტის გასაგზავნად დაცულ კავშირს.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2FMailConfigPage 65 Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as e-mail messages.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchangepath 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fdestpathlabel 3b Displays the selected folder to store the downloaded files.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautodownload 41 Enable the automatic download of updates to the specified folder.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchecknow 1e A check will be performed now.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feverymonth 27 A check will be performed once a month.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryweek 43 A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryday 25 A check will be performed once a day.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautocheck 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
34 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2FOptOnlineUpdatePage 68 Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fselect_persona_dialog%2Fframe4 56 Shows a random choice of nine themes based on the categories displayed in the buttons.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fselect_persona_dialog%2Fsearch_term 2f Type or paste the URL of the theme’s webpage.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpersonalization_tab%2Fown_persona 53 Choose this option to open the “Select Firefox Theme” dialog and pick your own.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpersonalization_tab%2Fdefault_persona 27 Display the system theme, if available.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpersonalization_tab%2Fno_persona 58 The toolbars’ background inherits the background settings of your desktop environment.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finpassword 2c პაროლის შეყვანა.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finusername 72 შეიყვანეთ IMAP სერვერის მომხმარებლის სახელი.
54 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2FAuthenticationSettingsDialog 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
46 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fauthentication 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fusername 72 SMTP სერვერის მომხმარებლის სახელი შეიყვანეთ.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fserver 8c შეიყვანეთ თქვენი POP 3 ან IMAP საფოსტო სერვერის მისამართი.
43 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Foutpassword 6e მომხმარებლის სახელი და პაროლი შეიყვანეთ.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fport 53 POP3 ან IMAP სერვერზე პორტის შეყვანა.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fpop3 8d საზღვრავს რომ შემომავალი საფოსტო სერვერი იყენებს POP 3.
4e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fseparateauthentication 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fsmtpafterpop 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fimap 8c საზღვრავს რომ შემომავალი საფოსტო სერვერი იყენებს IMAP.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Fstop 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Ferrors 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2FTestMailSettings 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
21 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2FCertPage 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
1f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fstatus 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
23 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fsignatures 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
28 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2Fvaluedetails 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2FCertDetails 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2Ftablecontainer 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
20 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertgeneral%2Fbox1 61 The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate.
16 .uno%3ACustomAnimation 28 Opens the Custom Animation sidebar deck.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 133 გახსენით დიალოგი მონიშნული სურათის ფაილად ჩასაწერად. ფაილის ნაგულისხმელი ფორმატია ინტერნეტის სურათების ფორმატი.
10 .uno%3APageSetup 49 Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fshapes f6 In the submenu you can choose to display a list of all shapes or only the named shapes. Use drag-and-drop in the list to reorder the shapes. When you set the focus to a slide and press the Tab key, the next shape in the defined order is selected.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdragmode 3d Drag and drop slides and named objects into the active slide.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Flast 2a Jumps to the last slide in the slide show.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fnext 29 Move forward one slide in the slide show.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Ffirst 2b Jumps to the first slide in the slide show.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdocuments 24 Lists available $[officename] files.
18 HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_PEN 5c Switches the mouse pointer to a pen that you can use to write on slides during a slide show.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Ftree 49 Lists available slides. Double-click a slide to make it the active slide.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fprevious 27 Moves back one slide in the slide show.
39 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2FNavigatorPanel 5b Opens the Navigator, where you can quickly jump to other slides or move between open files.
24 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fend 76 Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy.
27 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fheight 5b Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object.
26 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fstart 27 Choose a color for the selected object.
26 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fangle ce Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction.
22 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fy c3 Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up.
22 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fx d6 Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left.
26 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fwidth 5a Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object.
29 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fviewdata a7 Enters the width and the height values of the selected object in the X axis and the Y axis boxes respectively as well as the fill color of the object in the Start box.
27 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fcopies 2c Enter the number of copies you want to make.
12 .uno%3ACopyObjects 2e Makes one or more copies of a selected object.
11 .uno%3ARenamePage 1a Renames the selected page.
11 .uno%3ADeletePage 22 Deletes the current slide or page.
12 .uno%3ADeleteLayer 19 Deletes the active layer.
34 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcrossfadedialog%2Forientation 39 Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects.
33 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcrossfadedialog%2Fattributes 4d Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects.
33 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcrossfadedialog%2Fincrements 45 Enter the number of shapes you want between the two selected objects.
f .uno%3AMorphing 56 Creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdlgfield%2FformatLB 26 Select a display format for the field.
2a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdlgfield%2FvarRB 28 Displays the current value of the field.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdlgfield%2FfixedRB 3e Displays the content of the field when the field was inserted.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdlgfield%2FlanguageLB 22 Select the language for the field.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdlgfield%2FEditFieldsDialog 2a Edits the properties of an inserted field.
10 .uno%3AShowRuler 4d Displays or hides rulers at the top and left or right edges of the workspace.
1b .uno%3ACommonTaskBarVisible 1b Common commands for slides.
17 .uno%3ASelectBackground 7f Opens a file dialog to select a picture. The picture will be scaled and inserted on the background of the current master slide.
1b .uno%3ADisplayMasterObjects 46 When enabled, the current slide shows the objects of the master slide.
1e .uno%3ADisplayMasterBackground 49 When enabled, the current slide shows the background of the master slide.
f .uno%3APageMenu 34 Opens a submenu with commands for the current slide.
f HID_SD_BTN_DRAW 43 Switches to normal view, where you can create and edit your slides.
12 HID_SD_BTN_OUTLINE 5b Switches to outline view, where you can add, edit and reorganize slide titles and headings.
10 HID_SD_BTN_SLIDE 4b Displays miniature versions of the slides so they can easily be rearranged.
10 .uno%3ANotesMode 3f Switches to notes view, where you can add notes to your slides.
13 SD_HID_SD_BTN_NOTES 3f Switches to notes view, where you can add notes to your slides.
12 HID_SD_BTN_HANDOUT 61 Switches to the handout page view, where you can scale several slides to fit on one printed page.
17 HID_SD_BTN_PRESENTATION 17 Starts your slide show.
15 HID_SD_BTN_MASTERPAGE 7e Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show.
16 .uno%3ACloseMasterPage 1d Closes the master slide view.
17 .uno%3ARenameMasterPage 45 Select a master slide and click this icon to rename the master slide.
17 .uno%3ADeleteMasterPage 57 Select a master slide and click this icon to remove the master slide from the document.
17 .uno%3AInsertMasterPage 7d Inserts a new master slide into the document. Double-click the new master slide on the Slides pane to apply it to all slides.
16 .uno%3ASlideMasterPage 86 Switches to master slide view, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides that use the same master slide.
16 .uno%3ANotesMasterPage 4e Displays the master notes, where you can set the default formatting for notes.
14 .uno%3AMasterLayouts 4c Add header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the master slide.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fmasterlayoutdlg%2Fpagenumber 34 Adds a slide number placeholder to the master slide.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fmasterlayoutdlg%2Ffooter 2e Adds a footer placeholder to the master slide.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fmasterlayoutdlg%2Fdatetime 31 Adds a date/time placeholder to the master slide.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fmasterlayoutdlg%2Fheader 38 Adds a header placeholder to the master slide for notes.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fmasterlayoutdlg%2FMasterLayoutDialog 66 Adds or removes header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the layout of the master slide.
18 SID_MASTER_LAYOUTS_NOTES 3f Add header, footer, date, and slide number to the master notes.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfooterdialog%2Fapply 34 Applies the current settings to the selected slides.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfooterdialog%2Fapply_all 67 Applies the settings to all the slides in your presentation, including the corresponding master slides.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Fdatetime_cb 24 Adds the date and time to the slide.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Ffooter_text 38 Adds the text that you enter to the bottom of the slide.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Fheader_cb 4c Adds the text that you enter in the Header text box to the top of the slide.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Ffooter_cb 4f Adds the text that you enter in the Footer text box to the bottom of the slide.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Fheader_text 35 Adds the text that you enter to the top of the slide.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Frb_fixed 3a Displays the date and time that you enter in the text box.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Fnot_on_title 54 Does not display your specified information on the first slide of your presentation.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Frb_auto 5a Displays the date and time that the slide was created. Select a date format from the list.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfooterdialog%2FHeaderFooterDialog 5b Adds or changes text in placeholders at the top and the bottom of slides and master slides.
39 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Flanguage_list 31 Select the language for the date and time format.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fheaderfootertab%2Fslide_number 29 Adds the slide number or the page number.
1e .uno%3AOutputQualityBlackWhite 34 Shows slides in pure black or white without shading.
1d .uno%3AOutputQualityGrayscale 2a Shows slides in shades of black and white.
19 .uno%3AOutputQualityColor 16 Shows slides in color.
11 .uno%3AInsertPage 31 Inserts a page after the currently selected page.
2b modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Finsertlayer%2Flocked 30 Prevent elements on the layer from being edited.
2c modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Finsertlayer%2Fvisible 17 Show or hide the layer.
2e modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Finsertlayer%2Fprintable 35 When printing, print or ignore this particular layer.
29 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Finsertlayer%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the new layer.
12 .uno%3AInsertLayer 57 Inserts a new layer in the document. Layers are only available in Draw, not in Impress.
26 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fdlgsnap%2Fpoint 15 Inserts a snap point.
25 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fdlgsnap%2Fvert 1d Inserts a vertical snap line.
22 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fdlgsnap%2Fy 5f Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page.
22 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fdlgsnap%2Fx 60 Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page.
25 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fdlgsnap%2Fhorz 1f Inserts a horizontal snap line.
13 .uno%3ACapturePoint 62 Inserts a snap point or snap line (also known as guide) that you can use to quickly align objects.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows 95 Inserts a new row above the active cell. The number of rows inserted correspond to the number of rows selected. The existing rows are moved downward.
15 .uno%3ADeleteSnapItem 2d Deletes the selected snap point or snap line.
12 .uno%3ASetSnapItem 66 Sets the position of the selected snap point or snap line relative to the top left corner of the page.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns ae Inserts a new column to the left of the active cell. The number of columns inserted correspond to the number of columns selected. The existing columns are moved to the right.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable 33 Inserts a new table into the current slide or page.
18 .uno%3AInsertSpreadsheet 33 Inserts a new table into the current slide or page.
15 .uno%3AImportFromFile 87 Inserts a file into the active slide. You can insert $[officename] Draw or Impress files, or text from an HTML document or a text file.
37 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Finsertslidesdialog%2Fbackgrounds 25 Unused master pages are not inserted.
31 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Finsertslidesdialog%2Flinks 6e Inserts a file or some file elements as a link that is automatically updated when the source file is modified.
14 .uno%3ADuplicatePage 3c Inserts a copy of the current slide after the current slide.
11 .uno%3AExpandPage c1 Creates a new slide from every top-level outline point (text one level below the title text in the outline hierarchy) in the selected slide. The outline text becomes the title of the new slide.
12 .uno%3ASummaryPage a4 Creates a new slide that contains a bulleted list from the titles of the slides that follow the selected slide. The summary slide is inserted behind the last slide.
19 .uno%3AInsertDateFieldFix 61 Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated.
19 .uno%3AInsertDateFieldVar 79 Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file.
19 .uno%3AInsertTimeFieldFix 61 Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated.
19 .uno%3AInsertTimeFieldVar 79 Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file.
16 .uno%3AInsertPageField 37 Inserts the page number into the current slide or page.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 5d Inserts the first and last names listed in the $[officename] user data into the active slide.
16 .uno%3AInsertFileField 53 Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after you save the file.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 131 განსაზღვრავს მონიშნული ცხრილის, მაგ., სახელს, სწორებას, დაშორებას, სვეტის სიგანეს, საზღვრების და ფონის პარამეტრებს.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 26 Create, edit, apply and manage styles.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE 63 Updates the Style selected in the Styles window with the current formatting of the selected object.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 45 Creates a new style using the format attributes of a selected object.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN c2 Applies the selected style to an object on your slide. Click the paint bucket icon and then click an object in your slide to apply the style. Click the paint bucket icon again to exit this mode.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 46 Show styles for formatting graphical elements, including text objects.
16 .uno%3ATemplateFamily5 35 Show styles used in %PRODUCTNAME Impress AutoLayouts.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 57 შლის მონიშნულ რიგ(ებ)ს ცხრილიდან.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidedesigndialog%2Fload 55 Displays the Load Slide Design dialog, where you can select additional slide designs.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidedesigndialog%2Fcheckmasters 53 Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidedesigndialog%2Fmasterpage 5a Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document.
19 .uno%3APresentationLayout af Displays the Slide Design dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current slide. Any objects in the slide design are inserted behind objects in the current slide.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Ftemplates 38 Displays the templates for the selected design category.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Fexpander 30 Shows or hides a preview of a selected template.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Fcategories 2f Displays the available slide design categories.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 57 შლის მონიშნულ რიგ(ებ)ს ცხრილიდან.
11 .uno%3AModifyPage 23 Opens a submenu with slide layouts.
12 .uno%3ARenameLayer 19 Renames the active layer.
12 .uno%3AModifyLayer 2d Changes the properties of the selected layer.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FLB_UNIT 79 Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FTSB_PARALLEL 45 Displays the text parallel to or at 90 degrees to the dimension line.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FTSB_AUTOPOSH 42 Determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text.
18 .uno%3AMeasureAttributes 54 Changes the length, measurement and guide properties of the selected dimension line.
3c cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HELPLINE_OVERHANG ce Specifies the length of the left and right guides starting at the baseline (line distance = 0). Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and negative values extend the guides below the baseline.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FMTR_LINE_DIST 57 Specifies the distance between the dimension line and the baseline (line distance = 0).
35 cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FTSB_BELOW_REF_EDGE 2d Reverses the properties set in the Line area.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HELPLINE_DIST cc Specifies the length of the right and left guides starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guides above the dimension line and negative values extend the guides below the dimension line.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HELPLINE1_LEN bf Specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DECIMALPLACES 4f Specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line properties.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 60 Determines the position of the dimension text with respect to the dimension line and the guides.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HELPLINE2_LEN c0 Specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fdimensionlinestabpage%2FTSB_AUTOPOSV 40 Determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text.
11 .uno%3ANewRouting 2b Resets the line skew values to the default.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_3 1e Enter a skew value for Line 3.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_2 1e Enter a skew value for Line 2.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_1 1e Enter a skew value for Line 1.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FLB_TYPE 31 Lists the types of connectors that are available.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_VERT_2 48 Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the end of the connector.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HORZ_2 4a Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the end of the connector.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_VERT_1 4e Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the beginning of the connector.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fconnectortabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HORZ_1 50 Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the beginning of the connector.
1a .uno%3AConnectorAttributes 23 Sets the properties of a connector.
13 .uno%3ABeforeObject 9c Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change.
13 .uno%3ABehindObject 97 Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change.
13 .uno%3AReverseOrder 34 Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects.
12 .uno%3AHyphenation 34 Turns hyphenation option for text objects on or off.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Fplay 30 Shows the current slide transition as a preview.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Fapply_to_all 59 Applies the selected slide transition to all slides in the current presentation document.
18 .uno%3ASlideChangeWindow 53 Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show.
a .uno%3ADia 53 Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Ftransitions_icons 44 Select the slide transition you want to use for the selected slides.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Fvariant_list 25 Select a variation of the transition.
45 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Ftransition_duration 2a Sets the duration of the slide transition.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Fsound_list 39 Lists sounds that can played during the slide transition.
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Fauto_after_value 9a Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Enter the seconds in the numerical field next to the spin button, or click the spin button.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Frb_auto_after 9a Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Enter the seconds in the numerical field next to the spin button, or click the spin button.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Fauto_preview 42 Select to see the slide transitions automatically in the document.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Floop_sound 3f Select to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts.
47 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2FSlideTransitionsPanel 53 Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fslidetransitionspanel%2Frb_mouse_click 35 Select to advance to the next slide on a mouse click.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fgroup 9c Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fdelall 2b Deletes all of the images in the animation.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fgetall 27 Adds an image for each selected object.
17 .uno%3AAnimationObjects 30 Creates a custom animation on the current slide.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fduration 9c Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fbitmap 24 Combines images into a single image.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Ffirst 33 Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fprev 1e Plays the animation backwards.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fgetone 2a Adds selected object(s) as a single image.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fstop 1c Stops playing the animation.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fnext 14 Plays the animation.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fcreate 2d Inserts the animation into the current slide.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Flast 32 Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fdelone 32 Deletes current image from the animation sequence.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Fnumbitmap 46 Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Falignment 24 Aligns the images in your animation.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdockinganimation%2Floopcount 36 Sets the number of times that the animation is played.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fauto_preview 4b Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide while you assign them.
13 .uno%3AEffectWindow 24 Assigns effects to selected objects.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fmove_down 56 Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fplay 33 Plays the selected animation effect in the preview.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fadd_effect 67 Opens the Custom Animation dialog to add another animation effect for the selected object on the slide.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Feffect_speed_list 41 Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fslideshow 2d Starts the slide show from the current slide.
39 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fmove_up 56 Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fchange_effect 6e Opens the Custom Animation dialog to change the animation effect for the selected entry on the animation list.
46 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Feffect_property_list 9a Selects the additional properties of the animation. Click the Options button to open the Effect Options dialog, where you can select and apply properties.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fremove_effect 3f Removes the selected animation effects from the animation list.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fstart_effect_list 3d Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Fmacro 4f Enter a path to the macro you want to run, or click Browse to locate the macro.
17 .uno%3AAnimationEffects 51 Defines how the selected object behaves when you click on it during a slide show.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Flistbox 5a Specifies the action that will run when you click the selected object during a slide show.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Ftree 35 Lists the slides and the objects that you can target.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Fbookmark 44 Enter the name of the slide or the object that you want to look for.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Fdocument 4e Enter a path to the file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Fbrowse 21 Locate the file you want to open.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Fprogram 55 Enter a path to the program you want to start, or click Browse to locate the program.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Ffind 2b Searches for the specified slide or object.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Ftreedoc 97 Opens and displays a file during a slide show. If you select a $[officename] file as the target document, you can also specify the page that will open.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Finteractionpage%2Fsound 54 Enter a path to the audio file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file.
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fchangeslidesbyclick 47 Advances to the next slide when you click on the background of a slide.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fanimationsallowed 40 Displays all frames of animated GIF files during the slide show.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fpointeraspen 5f Changes the mouse pointer to a pen which you can use to draw on slides during the presentation.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fpointervisible 2c Shows the mouse pointer during a slide show.
19 .uno%3APresentationDialog 99 Defines settings for your slide show, including which slide to start from, the way you advance the slides, the type of presentation, and pointer options.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Falwaysontop 85 The $[officename] window remains on top during the presentation. No other program will show its window in front of your presentation.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fallslides 2e Includes all of the slides in your slide show.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Ffrom_cb 24 Enter the number of the start slide.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fcustomslideshow_cb 59 Runs a custom slide show in the order that you defined in Slide Show - Custom Slide Show.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fauto a9 Restarts the slide show after the pause interval you specify. A pause slide is displayed between the final slide and the start slide. Press the Esc key to stop the show.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fdefault 1d A full screen slide is shown.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fpauseduration 92 Enter the duration of the pause before the slide show is repeated. If you enter zero, the show restarts immediately without showing a pause slide.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fpresdisplay_cb 38 Select a display to use for full screen slide show mode.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fmanualslides 3c Slides never change automatically when this box is selected.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fwindow 34 Slide show runs in the $[officename] program window.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpresentationdialog%2Fshowlogo 33 Displays the $[officename] logo on the pause slide.
36 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fstartshow 6c Runs the slide show. Ensure that Use Custom Slide Show is selected if you want to run a custom presentation.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fcopy 67 Creates a copy of the selected custom slide show. You can modify the name of the show by clicking Edit.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fedit 5b Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fusecustomshows 6a Runs the custom slide show you selected when you click Start. Otherwise, the entire presentation is shown.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fcustomshowlist 30 Lists the custom slide shows that are available.
17 .uno%3ACustomShowDialog bd Defines a custom slide show using slides within the current presentation. You can then pick slides to meet the needs of your audience. You can create as many custom slide shows as you want.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdefinecustomslideshow%2Fcustompages 86 Lists all of the slides in the custom slide show. If you want, you can change the order of the list by dragging the slides up or down.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdefinecustomslideshow%2Fpages 52 Lists all of the slides in the order in which they appear in the current document.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdefinecustomslideshow%2Fcustomname 52 Displays the name of the custom slide show. If you want, you can enter a new name.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdefinecustomslideshow%2Fremove 85 Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdefinecustomslideshow%2Fadd 98 Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button.
47 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fdefinecustomslideshow%2FDefineCustomSlideShow 1c Creates a custom slide show.
13 .uno%3AChangeBezier 30 Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve.
2a modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fvectorize%2Fpreview 3a Previews the converted image without applying the changes.
2c modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fvectorize%2Ffillholes 3a Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction.
28 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fvectorize%2Ftiles 38 Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill.
29 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fvectorize%2Fpoints 47 Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter.
29 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fvectorize%2Fcolors 91 Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image.
14 .uno%3AChangePolygon 56 Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines).
14 .uno%3AConvertInto3D 40 Converts the selected object to a three-dimensional (3D) object.
1d .uno%3AConvertInto3DLatheFast 5b Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis.
18 .uno%3AConvertIntoBitmap 55 Converts the selected object to a bitmap (a grid of pixels that represents an image).
1a .uno%3AConvertIntoMetaFile 6e Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap and vector graphic data.
19 .uno%3Aconvert_to_contour 42 Converts the selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons.
e .uno%3ACombine 3a Combines two or more selected objects into a single shape.
10 .uno%3ADismantle 31 Splits a combined object into individual objects.
e .uno%3AConnect 6e Creates a line or Bézier curve by connecting two or more lines, Bézier curves, or other objects with a line.
c .uno%3ABreak 33 Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command.
c .uno%3AMerge 8f Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the selection. This command is best used with overlapping objects.
10 .uno%3ASubstract 51 Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object.
10 .uno%3AIntersect 42 Creates a shape from the overlapping area of the selected objects.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationcreatetab%2Fauto_preview 35 Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide.
46 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationcreatetab%2Feffect_speed_list 41 Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect.
9 878874113 2b Select an effect and click OK to assign it.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationspanel%2Fmore_properties 57 Specifies additional properties for the selected element in the Custom Animations pane.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Ftext_delay 49 Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Fdim_color_list 15 Select the dim color.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Faeffect_list 61 Select a color to be shown after the animation ends, or select another after-effect from the list
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Fsound_preview 1e Plays the selected sound file.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Fsmooth_end 53 Enable this option to assign a gradually decreasing speed to the end of the effect.
48 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Ftext_animation_list 3b Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Fsound_list 45 Select a sound from the Gallery or select one of the special entries.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationeffecttab%2Fsmooth_start 55 Enable this option to assign a gradually increasing speed to the start of the effect.
2f SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PRESETPROPERTYBOX 27 Specifies the direction for the effect.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtexttab%2Freverse_order 29 Animates the paragraphs in reverse order.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtexttab%2Fauto_after_value 46 Enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent paragraphs.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtexttab%2Fanimate_shape 3a Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtexttab%2Fauto_after 67 If "Group text - By 1st level paragraphs" is selected, the paragraphs are animated one after the other.
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtexttab%2Fgroup_text_list 2e Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated
46 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Frb_click_sequence 4a Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Frewind 62 Specifies whether to let the animated shape return to its starting state after the animation ends.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Frepeat_list 37 Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Ftrigger_list 2f Select the shape by its name from the list box.
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Fanim_duration 25 Specifies the duration of the effect.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Fdelay_value 43 Specifies an additional delay of n seconds until the effect starts.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Frb_interactive 4f Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomanimationtimingtab%2Fstart_list 3d Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
13 .uno%3ALeftPaneDraw 22 Switches the Page Pane on and off.
16 .uno%3ALeftPaneImpress 22 Switches the Page Pane on and off.
10 .uno%3AHideSlide b8 მალავს არჩეულ სლაიდს, რათა სლაიდი არ გამოჩნდეს დიაფილმის ჩვენებისას,
12 .uno%3APagesPerRow f2 სლაიდების დამხარისხებელში შეიყვანეთ სათითაო სტრიქონში საჩვენებელი სლაიდების რაოდენობა.
10 .uno%3ADiaEffect 9a აირჩიეთ გადასვლის ეფექტი რომელიც გამოჩნდება სლაიდის წინ.
e .uno%3ADiaTime df შეიყვანეთ დრო რომლის გასვლის შემდეგაც დიაფილმი ავტომატურად გადავა შემგედ სლაიდზე.
16 .uno%3ARehearseTimings 84 მარცხენა ქვედა კუთხეში უშვებს დიაფილმს ტაიმერით.
f .uno%3APosition ab აჩვენებს კურსორის X და Y პოზიციას აგრეთვე არჩეული ობიექტის ზომას.
11 .uno%3APageStatus d8 აჩვენებს მიმდინარე სლაიდის ნომერს რომელსაც მოყვება სლაიდების საერთო რაოდენობა.
12 .uno%3AZoomPanning 6f ლაიდს ამოძრავებს $[officename] ფანჯრის ფარგლებში.
12 .uno%3AZoomToolBox 185 ზრდის ან ამცირებს მიმდინარე დოკუმენტის ჩვენების ზომას. დააწკაპუნეთ ხატულას გვერდით არსებულ ისარს რათა გახსნათგადიდების ინსტრუმენტების პანელი.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 55 აჩვენებს სლაიდს ორჯერ გაზრდილს.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 71 აჩვენებს მიმდინარე სლაიდს ნახევარი ზომით.
12 .uno%3AZoomObjects 82 ცვლის ეკრანს რათა დაეტიოს ყველა არჩეული ობიექტი.
f .uno%3AZoomNext 7d აბრუნებს გადიდების მოქმედებას წინა ბრძანებას.
f .uno%3AZoomPage 65 თქვენს ეკრანზე აჩვენებს მთელს სლაიდს.
14 .uno%3AZoomPageWidth da აvენებს სლაიდის სრულ სიგანეს. სლაიდის ზედა და ქვედა კიდეები შეიძლება არ გამოჩნდეს.
15 .uno%3AZoom100Percent 55 სლაიდის ნამდვილ ზომაში ჩვენება.
12 .uno%3AZoomOptimal 9b დისპლეის უცვლის ზომას რათა ყველა ობიექტი დაეტიოს სლაიდზე.
13 .uno%3AZoomPrevious a0 აბრუნებს თქვენს მიერ დაყენებულ მასშტაბირების წინა ფაქტორს.
1a .uno%3AInteractiveGradient 160 ცვლის არჩეული ობიექტის გრადაციის ფონს. ეს ბრძანება მოქმედებს მხოლოდ მაშინ თუ თქვენ მიანიჭეთ გრადაცია ობიექტს მენიუში: ფორმატი - არე.
c .uno%3AShear e1 გაძლევთ შაშუალებას გადაათრით არჩეული ობიექტის სახელურები მისი ფორმის შესაცვლელად.
11 .uno%3ACrookSlant 14d წარმოსახვითი წრეების გარშემო შემოხვევით ამახინჯებს არჩეულ ობიექტს.დასამახინჯებლად გადაათრიეთ არჩეული ობიექტის სახელური.
12 .uno%3ACrookRotate 14d წარმოსახვითი წრეების გარშემო შემოხვევით ამახინჯებს არჩეულ ობიექტს.დასამახინჯებლად გადაათრიეთ არჩეული ობიექტის სახელური.
19 .uno%3AConvertInto3DLathe ce გარდაქმნის არჩეულ 2D ობიექტ(ებ)ს 3D ობიექტებში, სიმეტრიის ხაზის გარშემო ბრუნვით.
1e .uno%3AInteractiveTransparence 37 Applies a transparency gradient to the selected object.
d .uno%3AMirror 2c8 ატრიალებს არჩეულ ობიექტ(ებ)ს სატრიალებელი ხაზის გარშემო, რომელიც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ გადაათრიოთ სლაიდის ნებისმიერ ადგილას. გადაათრიეთ ობიექტის სახელური სატრიეალებელი ხაზის თავზე, სატრიალებელი ხაზის ორიენტაციის შესაცვლელად გადაათრიეთ მისი ერთი წერტილი ახალ ადგილას.
13 .uno%3AAdvancedMode 7b ცვლის ობიექტ(ებ)ის ფორმას, ორიენტაციას ან ფონს.
1a .uno%3AGlueVertAlignCenter 9d როდესაც იცვლება ობიექტის ზომა, the current glue point remains fixed to the vertical center of the object.
19 .uno%3AGlueHorzAlignRight 122 როდესაც იცვლება ობიექტის ზომა, ამჟამინდელი წებოს წერტილი რჩება ფიქსირებული ობიექტის მარჯვენა კიდის მიმართ.
1e .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionLeft a0 შემაერთებელი მიაბამს არჩეულ წებოს წერტილს მარცხენა კიდეზე.
1f .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionRight a0 შემაერთებელი მიაბამს არჩეულ წებოს წერტილს მარჯვენა კიდეზე.
1d .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionTop 9b შემაერთებელი არჩეულ წებოს წერტილებს ზედა კიდეზე მიაბამს .
20 .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionBottom d9 შემაერთებელი არჩეულ წებოს წერტილს ქვედა კიდეზე მიაბამს. Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected glue point.
18 .uno%3AGlueHorzAlignLeft ff როდესაც იცვლება ობიექტის ზომა მიმდინარე წებოს წერტილი რჩება ობიექტის მარცხენა კიდეზე მიბმული.
16 .uno%3AGlueInsertPoint 91 ჩასვამს წებოს წერტილს იქ სადაც დააწკაპუნებთ ობიექტზე.
12 .uno%3AGluePercent f2 ინარჩუნებს არჩეული წებოს წერტილის შედარებით პოზისიას როდესაც თქვენ ობიექტს უცვლით ზომას.
1a .uno%3AGlueHorzAlignCenter 10f როდესაც იცვლება ობიექტის ზომა, ამჟამინდელი წებოს წერტილი რჩება ფიქსირებული ობიექტის ცენტრის მიმართ.
1a .uno%3AGlueVertAlignBottom 113 როდესაც იცვლება ობიექტის ზომა ,მიმდინარე წებოს წერტილი ფიქსირებული რჩება ობიექტის ქვედა კიდის მიმართ.
17 .uno%3AGlueVertAlignTop 116 როდესაც იცვლება ობიექტის ზომა, ამჟამინდელი წებოს წერტილი რჩება ფიქსირებული ობიექტის ზედა კიდის მიმართ.
20 .uno%3AVerticalTextFitToSizeTool 25e სადაც დააწკაპუნებთ ან გადაათრევთ მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ტექსტის ჩარჩოს ტექსტის ვერტიკალური მიმართულებით. ტექსტი, რომელიც შეგყავთ ავტომატურად ერგება ჩარჩოს განზომილებებს. (ამ ხატულის ჩართვით ირთვება აზიური მხარდაჭერა).
18 .uno%3ATextFitToSizeTool 16a ხატავს ტექსტურ ველს ის სადაც დააწკაპუნებთ დოკუმენტში. შეტანილი ტექსტის ზომა ავტომატურად შეიცვლება ტექსტური ველის ზომებზე მოსარგებად.
b .uno%3AText 191 ხატავს ტექსტურ ველს მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში იქ სადაც დააწკაპუნეთ ან გადაათრევთ. დოკუმენტში დააწკაპუნეთ ნებისმიერ ადგილას, შემდეგ ჩასვით თქვენი ტექსტი.
12 .uno%3ATextToolbox 4c The Text toolbar contains some icons to enter different types of text boxes.
1e .uno%3ASquare_Rounded_Unfilled 288 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ მომრგვალებულ კვადრატს. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს მომრგვალებული კვადრატის კუთხე და გადაათრიეთ სასურველ ზომამდე. მომრგვალებული მართკუთხედის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
16 .uno%3ASquare_Unfilled 213 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ კვადრატს. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს კვადრატის კუთხე და გადაათრიეთ სასურველ ზომამდე. მართკუთხედის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
1c .uno%3ARect_Rounded_Unfilled 291 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ მომრგვალებულ მართკუთხედს. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს მომრგვალებული მართკუთხედის კუთხე და გადაათრიეთ სასურველ ზომამდე. მომრგვალებული კვადრატის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
14 .uno%3ARect_Unfilled 244 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ მართკუთხედს. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს მართკუთხედის კუთხე და გადაათრიეთ სასურველ ზომამდე. მომრგვალებული კვადრატის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
13 .uno%3ARect_Rounded 28e მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს სავსე მომრგვალებულ მართკუთხედს. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს მომრგვალებული მართკუთხედის კუთხე და გადაათრიეთ სასურველ ზომამდე. მომრგვალებული კვადრატის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
15 .uno%3ASquare_Rounded e4 Draws a rounded square with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag.
d .uno%3ASquare 210 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს სავსე კვადრატს. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს კვადრატის კუთხე და გადაათრიეთ სასურველ ზომამდე. მართკუთხედის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
17 .uno%3ARectangleToolbox 106 მორგების ხელსაწყოთა ზოლის გამოყენებით თქვენ შეგიძლიათ დაამატოთ მართკუთხედების ხელსაწყოთა ზოლი.
10 .uno%3ACircleArc 409 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს რკალს, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია წრეზე. რკალის დასახატად, გადაათრიეთ წრე სასურველ ზომამდე და შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ რკალის საწყისი წერტილის განსასაზღვრად. გადაადგილეთ თქვენი მიმთითებელი იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს დასასრული და დააწკაპუნეთ. არ არის საჭირო წრეზე დააწკაპუნება. რკალის დასახატად, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია ელიპსზე, გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
15 .uno%3AEllipseToolbox 67 Using Customize Toolbar, you can add the Ellipse icon which opens the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar.
16 .uno%3ACircle_Unfilled 218 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში გადათრევის ადგილას ხატავს ცარიელ წრეს. წრის დასახატად დააწკაპუნეთ სასურველ ადგილზე და ათრიეთ სასურველი ზომის მისაღებად. ელიფსის დასახატად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift-ს.
d .uno%3ACircle 47d ხატავს შევსებულ ფიგურას რომელიც განისაზღვრება მრუდის ან ოვალით და ორი რადიუსის ხაზით მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში. ელიფსის დიაგრამის დასახატად ათრიეთ ოვალი სასურველ ზომამდე, შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ პირველი რადიუსის ხაზის მისათითებლად. გადაადგილეთ მიმთითებელი სასურველ ადგილას სადაც გნებავთ მეორე რადიუსის ხაზის გავლება და დააწკაპუნეთ. ოვალზე დაწკაპუნება საჭირო არ არის. წრიული დიაგრამის დასახატად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift-ს.
10 .uno%3ACirclePie 472 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს შევსებულ ფიგურას რომელიც განისაზღვრება წრის მრუდის და ორი რადიუსის ხაზით. წრიული დიაგრამის დასახატად ათრიეთ წრე სასურველ ზომამდე, პირველი რადიუსის ხაზის მისათითებლად შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ. გადაადგილეთ მიმთითებელი სასურველ ადგილზე იქ, სადაც გნებავთ მეორე რადიუსის ხაზის გავლება და დააწკაპუნეთ. წრეზე დაწკაპუნება საჭირო არ არის. ელიფსური დიაგრამის დასახატად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift-ს.
17 .uno%3AEllipse_Unfilled 218 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში გადათრევის ადგილას ხატავს ცარიელ ოვალს. ოვალის დასახატად დააწკაპუნეთ სასურველ ადგილზე და ათრიეთ სასურველი ზომის მისაღებად. წრის დასახატად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift-ს.
11 .uno%3AEllipseCut 1a7 Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag.
13 .uno%3APie_Unfilled 433 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ ფორმას, რომელიც განსაზღვრულია ოვალური რკალით და ორი რადიუსის ხაზით. წრიული ელიპსის დასახატად გადაათრიეთ ოვალი სასურველ ზომამდე და შემდეგ პირველი რადიუსის ხაზის განსასაზღვრად დააწკაპუნეთ სასურველ ადგილას. გადაადგილეთ თქვენი მიმთითებელი იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს მეორე რადიუსის ხაზი და დააწკაპუნეთ. წრიული წრის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
1a .uno%3AEllipseCut_Unfilled 4ba მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ ფორმას, რომელიც განსაზღვრულია ოვალური რკალით და დიამეტრის ხაზით. ელიპსის სეგმენტის დასახატად გადაათრიეთ ელიპსი სასურველ ზომამდე და შემდეგ დიამეტრის ხაზის დასაწყისის განსასაზღვრად დააწკაპუნეთ სასურველ ადგილას. გადაადგილეთ თქვენი მიმთითებელი იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს დიამეტრის ხაზის დასასრული და დააწკაპუნეთ. არ არის საჭირო დააწკაპუნოთ წრეზე. წრის სეგმენტის დასახატად, გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
19 .uno%3ACirclePie_Unfilled 490 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ ფორმას, რომელიც განსაზღვრულია ოვალური რკალით და ორი რადიუსის ხაზით. წრიული ელიპსის დასახატად გადაათრიეთ წრე სასურველ ზომამდე და შემდეგ პირველი რადიუსის ხაზის განსასაზღვრად დააწკაპუნეთ სასურველ ადგილას. გადაადგილეთ თქვენი მიმთითებელი იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს მეორე რადიუსის ხაზი და დააწკაპუნეთ. არ არის საჭირო დააწკაპუნოთ წრეზე. წრიული ელიპსის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
19 .uno%3ACircleCut_Unfilled 4e7 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს ცარიელ ფორმას, რომელიც განსაზღვრულია წრის რკალით და დიამეტრის ხაზით. წრის სეგმენტის დასახატად გადაათრიეთ წრე სასურველ ზომამდე და შემდეგ დიამეტრის ხაზის დასაწყისის განსასაზღვრად დააწკაპუნეთ სასურველ ადგილას. გადაადგილეთ თქვენი მიმთითებელი იმ ადგილას, სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს დიამეტრის ხაზის დასასრული და დააწკაპუნეთ. არ არის საჭირო წრეზე დააწკაპუნება. სეგმენტის დასახატად, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია ელიპსზე, გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
1e .uno%3APolygon_Diagonal_Unfill 3a2 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის სერიისგან შექმნილ ხაზს, რომელიც დახრილის 45 გრადუსიანი კუთხით. ხაზის სეგმენტის დასახატად გადაათრიეთ, დააწკაპუნეთ მისი დასასრული წერტილის განსასაზღვრად და შემდეგ ახალი ხაზის სეგმენტის დასახატად კვლავ გადაათრიეთ. სახატავი ხაზის დასასრულებლად დააწკაპუნეთ ორჯერ. დახურული ფორმის შესაქმნელად დააჭირეთ Alt და დააწკაპუნეთ ორჯერ.
f .uno%3AFreeline 21f სლაიდში გადათრევით ხატავს თავისუფალი ფორმის ხაზს. აშვებისას $[officename] ქმნის დახურულ ფორმას ხაზის დასასრულიდან დასაწყის წერტილამდე პირდაპირი ხაზის სეგმენტის ხატვით. ფორმა შეივსება მიმდინარე არეალის ფერით.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Diagonal 4f3 ხატავს დასრულებულ ფორმას, რომელიც გამოხატულია 45 გრადუსიანი კუთხის პირდაპირი ხაზის სეგმენტით. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილს, სადაც გინდათ რომ იყოს პოლიგონის დასაწყისი და გადაათრიეთ ხაზის სეგმენტის დასახატად. ხაზის სეგმენტის დასასრულის განსასაზღვრად დააწკაპუნეთ კვლავ და გააგრძელეთ წკაპუნი პოლიგონის ხაზის სეგმენტების განსასაზღვრავად. პოლიგონის ხატვის დასასრულებლად დააწკაპუნეთ ორჯერ. პოლიგონის რომელიც არაა 45 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დასახატად, დაწკაპუნებისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
e .uno%3APolygon 49d ხატავს დასრულებულ ფორმას, რომელიც გამოხატულია პირდაპირი ხაზის სეგმენტით. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილს, სადაც გინდათ რომ იყოს პოლიგონის დასაწყისი და გადაათრიეთ ხაზის სეგმენტის დასახატად. ხაზის სეგმენტის დასასრულის განსასაზღვრად დააწკაპუნეთ კვლავ და გააგრძელეთ წკაპუნი პოლიგონის ხაზის სეგმენტების განსასაზღვრავად. პოლიგონის ხატვის დასასრულებლად დააწკაპუნეთ ორჯერ. პოლიგონის 45 გრადუსიანი კუთხით შესაზღუდად დაწკაპუნებისას გეჭიროთ კლავიშზე Shift.
11 .uno%3ABezierFill 3dd ხატავს შევსებულ ფორმას, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია ბეზიერის მრუდზე. დააწკაპუნეთ იმ ადგილს, სადაც გინდათ რომ იყოს მრუდის დასაწყისი, გადაათრიეთ, აუშვით და შემდეგ გადაადგილეთ მიმთითებელი იმ ადგილას სადაც გინდათ, რომ იყოს დასასრული და დააწკაპუნეთ. მრუდზე პირდაპირი ხაზის სეგმენტის დასამატებლად გადაადგილეთ მიმთითებელი და კვლავ დააწკაპუნეთ. ფორმის დასახურად დააწკაპუნეთ ორჯერ.
12 .uno%3ALineToolbox 150 ხატვის ზოლზე, მრუდის ხატულა ხსნის სტრიქონების ხელსაწყოთა ზოლს, სადაც შეგიძლიათ დაამატოთ ხაზები და ფორმები მიმდინარე სლაიდში.
e .uno%3AShell3D 17b სლაიდში გადათრევისას ხატავს წრეზე დაფუძნებულ თასის ფორმის ობიექტს. ოვალზე დაფუძნებული ობიექტის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ Shift კლავიშზე.
c .uno%3ATorus 192 სლაიდში გადათრევისას ხატავს წრის ფორმის ობიექტს, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია წრეზე. ოვალზე დაფუძნებული ტორუსის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ Shift კლავიშზე.
e .uno%3ACyramid 441 სლაიდში გადათრევისას ხატავს კვადრატზე დაფუძნებულ პირამიდას. მართკუთხედზე დაფუძნებული პირამიდის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ Shift კლავიშზე. პირამიდის სხვა პოლიგონის განსასაზღვრად გახსენით დიალოგი სამგანზონილებიანი ეფექტები და დააწკაპუნეთ გეომეტრია ჩანართზე. სეგმენტების არეალში, სარკმელში სახელად ჰორიზონტალური  შეიტანეთ პოლიგონის მხარეების რიცხვი და შემდეგ დააწკაპუნეთ მწვანე მონიშვნის ნიშანზე.
f .uno%3ACylinder 17b სლაიდზე გადათრევისას ხატავს ცილინდრს, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია წრეზე. ოვალზე დაფუძნებული ცილინდრის დასახატად გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ Shift კლავიშზე.
11 .uno%3AHalfSphere 144 სლაიდში გადათრევისას იხატება სფეროს ერთი ნახევარი. სფეროდისი ერთი ნახევრის დასახატად, გადათრევისას გეჭიროთ Shift კლავიშზე.
d .uno%3ASphere 122 გადათრევის ადგილას ხატავს შევსებულ სფეროს. სფეროიდის დასახატად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift -ღილაკს.
b .uno%3ACone 217 გადათრევის ადგილას ხატავს კონუსს, რომელიც დაფუძნებულია წრეზე. ოვალზე დაფუძნებული ცილინდრის დასახატად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift -ღილაკს. Draws a cone that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cone that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag.
b .uno%3ACube 68 Draws a filled cube where you drag in the slide. To draw a 3D rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag.
17 .uno%3AObjects3DToolbox 6a Opens the 3D Objects toolbar. The objects are three dimensional, with depth, illumination, and reflection.
1e .uno%3AConnectorCurveCircleEnd 1da ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დასასრულ წერტილზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1b .uno%3AConnectorCurveArrows 1ce ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს ორივე ბოლოზე ისრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1d .uno%3AConnectorCurveArrowEnd 1dd ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დასასრულ წერტილზე ისრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
15 .uno%3AConnectorCurve 19b ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
20 .uno%3AConnectorCurveCircleStart 1da ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დაწყების წერტილზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1f .uno%3AConnectorLinesArrowStart 393 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს, რომელიც იწყება ისრით და იხრება კავშირის წერტილთან ახლოს. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
1b .uno%3AConnectorLinesArrows 3c9 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს, რომელიც იხრება კავშირის წერტილის ახლოს და რომელსაც ორივე ბოლოზე აქვს ისრები. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
1e .uno%3AConnectorLinesCircleEnd 3ab ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს, რომელიც ბოლოვდება წრით და იხრება დამაკავშირებლის წერტილის ახლოს. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
15 .uno%3AConnectorLines 36b ხატავს დამაკავშრებელს, რომელიც იხრება დამაკავშირებლის წერტილთან. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
1b .uno%3AConnectorCircleStart 230 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით და წრიული დაწყების წერტილით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
17 .uno%3AConnectorToolbox 2e4 გახსენით ხელსაწყოთა ზოლი კავშირები სადაც შეგიძლიათ მიმდინარე სლაიდში დაამატოთ დამაკავშირებლები ობიექტებზე. ის ხაზი, რომელიც აერთიანებს ობიექტებს და რჩება მიბმული ობიექტების გადაადგილებისას. თუ დააკოპირებთ ობიექტს დამაკავშირებლიანად, დაკოპირდება ასევე დამაკავშირებელიც.
17 .uno%3AConnectorCircles 21c ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით და ორივე ბოლოზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით..
1f .uno%3AConnectorCurveArrowStart 1dd ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დაწყების წერტილზე ისრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
16 .uno%3AConnectorArrows 224 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით და ისრებით ორივე ბოლოზე. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
19 .uno%3AConnectorCircleEnd 239 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით და წრიაული დაბოლოების წერტილით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
18 .uno%3AConnectorArrowEnd 239 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით და ისრიანი დაბოლოების წერტილით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1e .uno%3AConnectorLineCircleStar 1e6 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დაწყების წერტილზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
10 .uno%3AConnector 1e4 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1a .uno%3AConnectorArrowStart 233 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს ერთი ან მეტი 90 გრადუსიანი კუთხის დახრით და ისრიანი დაწყების წერტილით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1d .uno%3AConnectorLinesArrowEnd 399 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს, რომელიც მთავრდება ისრით და იხრება კავშირის წერტილის ახლოს. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
1b .uno%3AConnectorLineCircles 1d7 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს ორივე ბოლოზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1c .uno%3AConnectorLinesCircles 3c9 ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს, რომელიც იხრება კავშირის წერტილის ახლოს და რომელსაც ორივე ბოლოში აქვს წრეები. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
20 .uno%3AConnectorLinesCircleStart 38d ხატავს დამაკავშირებელს, რომელიც იწყება წრით და იხრება კავშირის წერტილის ახლოს. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით. დახრის წერტილსა და კავშირის წერტილს შორის ხაზის სეგმენტის სიგრძის გასასწორებლად დააწკაპუნეთ დამაკავშირებელზე და გადაათრიეთ დახრის წერტილი.
14 .uno%3AConnectorLine 168 ხატავს სწორ შემაერთებელ ხაზს. ობიექტზე დააწკაპუნეთ შემაერთებელ წერტილს, გადაათრიეთ შეერთების წერტილი სხვა ობიექტთან, შემდეგ გაუშვით.
1e .uno%3AConnectorLineArrowStart 1e9 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დაწყების წერტილზე ისრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1c .uno%3AConnectorCurveCircles 1cb ხატავს მრუდე ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს ორივე ბოლოზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1c .uno%3AConnectorLineArrowEnd 1e9 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დასასრულ წერტილზე ისრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1a .uno%3AConnectorLineArrows 1e0 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს ორივე ბოლოზე ისრებით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
1d .uno%3AConnectorLineCircleEnd 1e6 ხატავს პირდაპირი ხაზის დამაკავშირებელს დასასრულ წერტილზე წრით. დააწკაპუნეთ ობიექტის დამაკავშირებლის წერტილზე, გადაათრიეთ დამაკავშირებლის წერტილი სხვა ობიექტზე და შემდეგ აუშვით.
14 .uno%3AInsertToolbox 11c გახსენით ჩასმის ხელსაწყოთა ზოლი, სადაც შეგიძლიათ დაამატოთ ობიექტები, toolbar, where you can add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document.
16 .uno%3ALineSquareArrow 1d5 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში გადათრევის შემთხვევასი ხატავს სწორ ხაზს რომელიც იწყება კვადრატით და მთავრდება ისრით. Draws a straight line that starts with a square and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag.
15 .uno%3ALineArrowStart 157 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში ხატავს პირდაპირ ხაზს, რომელიც იწყება ისრით. ხაზის 45 გრადუსით დასახრელად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ Shift კლავიშზე.
14 .uno%3ALine_Diagonal 81 ხატავს 45 გრადუსიანი კუთხით დახრილ პირდაპირ ხაზს.
11 .uno%3ALineArrows 18d ხატავს სწორ ხაზს ბოლოებში ისრებით, როდესაც გადაათრევთ მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში. ხასის 45 გრადუსზე დასახატათ გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Shift ღილაკზე.
12 .uno%3AMeasureLine ec ხატაბს ხაზს, რომელიც არის ასახავს განზომილების სიგრძეს შემოსაზღვრულს პირობითი ხაზებით.
16 .uno%3ALineArrowSquare 1bb მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში გადათრევისას ხატავს პირდაპირ ხაზს, რომელიც იწყება ისრით და მთავრდება კვადრატით. ხაზის 45 გრადუსით დასახრელად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ Shift კლავიშზე.
16 .uno%3ALineArrowCircle 1a6 მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში გადათრევით ხატავს პირდაპირ ხაზს, რომელიც იწყება ისრით და მთავრდება წრით. ხაზის 45 გრადუსით დასახრელად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ Shift კლავიშზე.
13 .uno%3ALineArrowEnd 9a Draws a straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag.
16 .uno%3ALineCircleArrow 1ac მიმდინარე დოკუმენტში გადათრევისას ხატავს პირდაპირ ხაზს, რომელიც იწყება წრით და მთავრდება ისრით. ხაზის 45 გრადუსით დასახრელად გადათრევისას დააჭირეთ Shift კლავიშზე.
14 .uno%3AArrowsToolbox 167 გახსენით ხელსაწყოთა ზოლი ისრები სადაც შეგიძლიათ პირდაპირი, ისრიანი და განზომილებიანი ხაზების მიმდინარე სლაიდში ან გვერდში დამატება.
19 .uno%3AOutlineCollapseAll e0 Hides all of the headings of the slides in the current slide show except for the titles of the slides. Hidden headings are indicated by a black line in front of a slide title. To show the headings, click the All Levels icon.
17 .uno%3AOutlineExpandAll 1c1 მიმდინარე დიაფილმში აჩვენებს სლაიდების დამალულ სათაურებს. მიმდინარე დიაფილმში ყველა სლაიდის დასამალად, გარდა სლაიდის სათაურებისა დააწკაპუნეთ ხატულაზე პირველი დონე.
16 .uno%3AOutlineCollapse 1e9 მალავს არჩეული სათაურის ქვესათაურებს. დამალული ქვესათაურები აღინიშნებიან სათაურის წინ შავი ხაზით. სათაურების დაბალი დონის საჩვენებლად დააწკაპუნეთ ხატულაზე ქვეწერტილების ჩვენება.
14 .uno%3AOutlineExpand 170 აჩვენებს არჩეული სათაურის დამალულ ქვესათაურებს. არჩეული სათაურის ქვესათაურების დასამალად დააწკაპუნეთ ხატულაზე ქვეწერტილების დამალვა.
14 .uno%3AOutlineFormat b4 Shows or hides the character formatting of the slide headings. To change the character formatting of a heading, open the Styles window, right-click a style, and then choose Modify.
10 .uno%3AColorView 62 აჩვენებს თქვენს სლაიდებს შავ-თეთრად.
13 .uno%3AGlueEditMode 15c წებოს წერტილის ჩასმა არ შეცვლა.წებოს წერტილი არის მორგებული კავშირის წერტილი, სადაც თქვენ შეგიძლიათ მიაბათ დამაკავშირებელი ხაზი.
1a .uno%3AClickChangeRotation 155 ცვლის მოუსის დაწკაპუნების მოქმედებას ისე, რომ დაწკაპუნების შემდეგ გაჩნდეს ბრუნვის ხელმოსაჭიდები, შემდეგ დააჭირეთ კიდე ერთხელ.
14 .uno%3AAnimationMode 204 სლაიდში ობიექტზე დაწკაპუნებისას უკრავს ანიმაციის ობიექტისთვის მინიჭებულ ეფექტის წინასწარი ნახვის რეჟიმში. ობიექტის რედაქტირებისთვის ასარჩევად დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Alt ღილაკს დაწკაპუნებისას.
11 .uno%3AActionMode 200 ჩართავს იმ ინტერაქციის გადახედვის რეჟიმს რომელიც მიენიჭება ობიექტს, სლაიდში ობიექტზე დაწკაპუნების შემდეგ. ობიექტის რედაქტირებისთვის ასარჩევად დააჭირეთ და გეჭიროთ Alt ღილაკს დაწკაპუნებისას.
17 .uno%3AHelplinesVisible 182 აჩვენებს ან მალავს მიზიდვის ხაზებს ისე რომ თქვენ შეგიძლიათ გაუსწოროთ ობიექტები თქვენს მხარედ. მიზიდვის ხაზის ამოსაღებად გაათრიეთ ის სლაიდიდან.
1a .uno%3ADoubleClickTextEdit 129 ცვლის მაუსის დაწკაპუნების შედეგს ისე, რომ ორჯერ დაწკაპუნებით შევენ შეძლებთ ტექსტის დამატებას ან რედაქტირებას.
12 .uno%3ASolidCreate 13c თუ ეს ხატუკა გააქტიურდებაპარამეტრების ზოლში, ობიექტები გამოჩნდებია მათი ატრიბუტებით თქვენს მიერ მათი დახატვის დროს..
15 .uno%3ALeaveAllGroups a7 გამოდის ყველა ჯგუფიდან გასვლა და უბრუნდება ჩვეულებრივ ხედვას.
23 SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_LAYOUTS 55 Click to apply a slide design to all selected slides. Right-click for a context menu.
1f .uno%3ATaskPaneShowSmallPreview 29 Resizes the preview of the master slides.
1f .uno%3ATaskPaneShowLargePreview 29 Resizes the preview of the master slides.
24 .uno%3ATaskPaneApplyToSelectedSlides 44 Applies the master slide or the slide design to the selected slides.
1f .uno%3ATaskPaneApplyToAllSlides 27 Applies the master slide to all slides.
1f SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_ALL 53 Left-click to apply the master slide to all slides. Right-click for a context menu.
22 SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_RECENT 53 Left-click to apply the master slide to all slides. Right-click for a context menu.
23 SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_CURRENT 53 Left-click to apply the master slide to all slides. Right-click for a context menu.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fphotoalbum%2FPhotoAlbumCreatorDialog 36 Inserts a photo album into your presentation document.
b .uno%3A1234 a6 The Presenter Console displays the slide show in an external screen (projector or large television), while the presentation controls are shown in the computer screen.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 35 All columns of the current selection will be deleted.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns d4 If currently no cell is selected, a new column will be inserted at the right border of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new columns as the selection has will be inserted right of the selection.
15 .uno%3AAlignObjetMenu 29 Align the table within the page or slide.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 6d Distributes the width of the selected or all columns to the same size. The width of the table is not changed.
11 .uno%3AColumnMenu 30 Choose commands for the selected or all columns.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows c5 If currently no cell is selected, a new row will be inserted at the bottom of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new rows as the selection has will be inserted below the selection.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 96 If currently no cell is selected, all rows will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all rows containing the selected cells will be selected.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 9c If currently no cell is selected, all columns will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all columns containing the selected cells will be selected.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 6c Distributes the height of the selected or all rows to the same size. The height of the table is not changed.
e .uno%3ARowMenu 2d Choose commands for the selected or all rows.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fnewtabledialog%2Fcolumns 2e Enter the number of columns for the new table.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fnewtabledialog%2Frows 2b Enter the number of rows for the new table.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 32 All rows of the current selection will be deleted.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnewtabledialog%2FNewTableDialog 2e Enter the number of columns for the new table.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 3f The cell contents are aligned vertically centered in the cells.
f .uno%3ACellMenu 55 Define the vertical alignment of selected or all cell contents. Split or merge cells.
12 .uno%3ASelectTable 4c ქმნის ახალ საბაზო დოკუმენტს.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 52 The selected cell is split into several cells. You see the Split Cells dialog box.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 34 The cell contents are align at the top of the cells.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 2c All selected cells are merged into one cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 39 The cell contents are aligned at the bottom of the cells.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 5c These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 4d This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 52 This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu 9b This menu contains the commands that are used to insert new elements into the document, for example, graphics, objects, special characters and other files.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu dd შეიცავს ბრძანებებს თქვენი დოკუმენტის განლაგებისა და შინაარსის ფორმატირებისთვის.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu 9c Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 43 Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows.
11 .uno%3AModifyMenu 39 Contains commands for modifying objects in your document.
14 .uno%3ASlideShowMenu 39 Contains commands and options for running a presentation.
d .uno%3AShrink 2b Reduces the font size of the selected text.
b .uno%3AGrow 2d Increases the font size of the selected text.
5 dummy 34 The Slide View bar opens with the Slide Sorter view.
